ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENTenvironmentclearance.nic.in/.../EIA/01102018MHVW38DTEIAReportB… ·...

F.No. J-11011/75/2017-IA.II(I) dated 25th

April 2017 & F.No. J-11011/64/2017-IA.II(I) dated 31

st May 2017

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

For

ESTABLISHMENT OF EARLY PRODUCTION SYSTEM AT BTSAD, BHIMAVARAM, WEST GODAVARI DISTRICT, ANDHRA PRADESH

Project Proponents:

Oil & Natural Gas Corporation Godavari Bhavan, Rajahmundry - 533108 East Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh.

Environmental Consultants:

Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt. Limited

(A Bureau Veritas Group Company) Sanath Nagar, Hyderabad- 500 034

JUNE 2018

IND.BH.41.17.0347/HSR/EIA

Environmental Impact Assessment Report for

Establishment of Early Production System

at BTSAD in Bantumilli South Field Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh

M/s Oil & Natural Gas Corporation

Document Reference : : IND.BH.41.17.0347/HSR Revision: Draft, Rev01, dated 19/06/2018

Copyright Bureau Veritas India Pvt. Ltd. All rights reserved

Environmental Impact Assessment Report for Establishment of Early Production System at BTSAD in Bantumilli South Field, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh for M/s Oil & Natural Gas Corporation

Declaration

Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt. Ltd. (a Bureau Veritas Group Company) Project Reference: IND.BH.41.17.0347/HSR Rev. 01, Draft 3

I) DECLARATION BY EXPERTS

Declaration by Experts Contributing to the EIA - Environmental Impact Assessment Report for Establishment of Early Production System at BTSAD in Bantumilli South Field, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh for M/s Oil & Natural Gas Corporation I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA. EIA Coordinator: Name : E Shyam Sundar

Signature :

Period of Involvement : January 2018 - Till Date Contact Information : Plot No. 7-2-C14, Industrial Estate, Sanath Nagar,

Hyderabad-500018, Telangana, India Functional Area Experts:

S. No.

Functional Areas

Name of the Expert/s

Involvement Signature &

Date

1 AP (Air Pollution Monitoring, Prevention & Control)

K Sandhya, M Sandeep (FAE - B)

AAQ monitoring plan, impact prediction & management plan studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

2 WP (Water Pollution Monitoring, Prevention & Control)

E Shyam Sundar

Water Pollution Monitoring, Prevention & Control studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

3 SHW (Solid Waste and Hazardous Waste Management)

E Shyam Sundar M Sandeep (FAE - B)

Solid Waste Management studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

4 SE (Socio-Economics)

Mamta Singh Bodhale

Socioeconomic study (January 2018 - Till Date)

5 EB (Ecology and Biodiversity)

Dr. Manoj Kumar Pardesi

Ecology & Biodiversity studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

6 HG (Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation)

Rajendra Prasad P Suresh, (Cat-B)

Hydrology studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

7 GEO (Geology) Rajendra Prasad (P Suresh, Cat-B)

Geology studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

8 SC (Soil Conservation)

B S Lole Soil quality, impacts and conservation measures (January 2018 - Till Date)

9 AQ (Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling

E Shyam Sundar, M Sandeep

Air Quality Assessment studies (January 2018 - Till Date)


Declaration


S. No.

Functional Areas

Name of the Expert/s

Involvement Signature &

Date

&Prediction) (FAE - B)

10 NV (Noise/ Vibration)

B Bhaskar Rao

Noise/ Vibration studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

11 LU (Land Use)

M Chaitanya Reddy

Land use studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

12 RH (Risk Assessment & Hazard Management)

K Sandhya Risk assessment and DMP Studies (January 2018 - Till Date)

One TM against each FAE may be shown


Declaration


II) DECLARATION BY THE HEAD OF THE ACCREDITED CONSULTANT ORGANIZATION/ AUTHORIZED PERSON

I, E Shyam Sundar, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report for Establishment of Early Production System (EPA) at BTSAD in Bantumilli South Field, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh for M/s Oil & Natural Gas Corporation (PP). This report has been prepared by M/s Bhagavathi Ana Labs Private Limited (BALPL) on behalf of and for the use of the PP with due consideration and skills as per our general terms and conditions of business and the terms of agreement with PP. BALPL is a Bureau Veritas Group Company based in India, who has local accreditations to National Accreditation Board for Education & Training (NABET) and Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), Govt of India. BALPL has prepared the EIA report with baseline data for 3 months starting from January 2018 as per the approved ToR issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi. The technical information or conclusion / recommendations herein enclosed have been derived based on the various study reports and data provided wrt the project by PP and shall be considered as a Technical Professional Opinion. It shall not be construed as a formal opinion and it does not waive any involved Party’s rights & responsibilities or obligations with respect to the project requirements at any phase of the project. These conclusions will become null and void should BALPL not be kept informed of such modifications or alterations with specific reference to the present document No IND.BH.41.17.0347/HSR. This document is valid only when presented in full. I also confirm that the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any misleading information mentioned in this statement. It is certified that no unethical practice, like ‘copy and paste’, and used external data / text without proper acknowledgement, were resorted to while preparing this EIA report.

Signature :

Name : E Shyam Sundar

Designation : Head (Env)

Name of the EIA Consultant Organization

: Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt. Limited (A Bureau Veritas Group Company)

NABET Certificate No. & Issue Date : NABET/EIA/1619/ra0049 dated 29 May, 2017


Revision History


III) REVIEW AND REVISION HISTORY

History of revisions of the present report:

Rev Date Modifications

Rev. 00 Draft 25-4-2018 Preliminary Draft EIA Report

Rev 01 Draft 19-6-2018 Draft EIA Report with Client Comments

Table I: History of the Revisions

Document No. : IND.BH.41.17.0347/HSR, Rev. 01, Draft

Rev. 01 Draft

19-6-2018 Draft EIA Report with Client Comments

K. Sandhya MV Raghavacharyulu

E Shyam Sundar

Rev. 00 Draft

25-4-2018 Preliminary Draft EIA Report

K. Sandhya MV Raghavacharyulu

E Shyam Sundar

REV DATE DESCRIPTION REVIEW-1 REVIEW-2 APPROVAL


Contents


IV) TABLE OF CONTENTS

I) DECLARATION BY EXPERTS ................................................................................................... 3

II) DECLARATION BY THE HEAD OF THE ACCREDITED CONSULTANT ORGANIZATION/ AUTHORIZED PERSON .................................................................................. 5 III) REVIEW AND REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................... 6 IV) TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................... 7 V) REFERENCES ............................................................................................................... 15

1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 16

1.1 PREAMBLE ........................................................................................................................ 16 1.2 IMPORTANCE OF THE PROJECT TO THE NATION ...................................................... 17 1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT PROPONENT & PROJECT.......................................... 17 1.3.1 DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 17 1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT ............................................................................... 17 1.4.1 CAPACITY .......................................................................................................................... 17 1.4.2 COST OF THE PROJECT .................................................................................................. 18 1.4.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT ......................................................................................... 18 1.5 STATUS & STAGE OF REGULATORY CLEARANCES ................................................... 24 1.6 SCOPE OF THE STUDY .................................................................................................... 24 1.7 METHODOLOGY / APPROACH ........................................................................................ 25 1.8 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT ........................................................................................ 25 1.9 TOR COMPLIANCE ........................................................................................................... 29

2. PROCESS DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 33

2.1 PRODUCTION PLANT DETAILS ....................................................................................... 33 2.2 NEED FOR THE PROJECT ............................................................................................... 34 2.3 EPS CAPACITY .................................................................................................................. 34 2.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND EVACUATION ...................................................................... 34 2.4.1 WELL DETAILS .................................................................................................................. 34 2.5 TECHNOLOGY & PROCESS DESCRIPTION .................................................................. 34 2.5.1 FEED COMPOSITION ....................................................................................................... 34 2.5.2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 35 2.5.3 SCHEME CONCEPTUALIZATION .................................................................................... 35 2.5.3.1 GROUP HEADER ............................................................................................................... 35 2.5.4 GAS PROCESSING FACILITIES ....................................................................................... 36 2.5.4.1 HIGH PRESSURE LOW PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES ................................................. 36 2.5.4.2 TEST HEADER ................................................................................................................... 36 2.5.4.3 TEST SEPARATORS ......................................................................................................... 37 2.5.4.4 SEPARATION ..................................................................................................................... 37 2.5.4.5 GAS CONDITIONING ........................................................................................................ 37 2.5.5 CONDENSATE STABILIZATION, STORAGE AND EVACUATION .................................. 41 2.5.6 OFF GAS COMPRESSOR ................................................................................................. 42 2.5.7 GAS SUPPLY ..................................................................................................................... 42 2.5.8 PRODUCED WATER STORAGE AND EVACUATION ..................................................... 42 2.5.9 UTILITIES REQUIREMENT FOR GAS PROCESSING FACILITY ................................... 42 2.5.9.1 PLANT/INSTRUMENT AIR ................................................................................................ 42 2.5.9.2 POWER REQUIREMENT .................................................................................................. 42 2.5.9.3 RAW/SERVICE WATER .................................................................................................... 42 2.5.9.4 LOADING SYSTEM & WEIGH BRIDGE PACKAGE ......................................................... 42 2.5.9.5 FUEL GAS SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 42 2.5.9.6 FIREFIGHTING SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 43


Contents


2.6 GAS PROFILE FOR SALES, INTERNAL USE: ................................................................. 43 2.7 RESOURCE REQUIREMENT............................................................................................ 44 2.7.1 LAND REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................................... 44 2.7.2 WATER REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 44 2.7.2.1 SOURCE OF WATER AND ITS MANAGEMENT .............................................................. 44 2.7.3 WORKFORCE ARRANGEMENTS .................................................................................... 44 2.7.4 POWER REQUIREMENT AT EPS .................................................................................... 44 2.7.5 CHEMICAL STORAGE ...................................................................................................... 44 2.7.6 LOGISTICS ......................................................................................................................... 45 2.8 SOURCES OF POLLUTION .............................................................................................. 45 2.8.1 NOISE GENERATING SOURCES ..................................................................................... 45 2.8.2 SOLID WASTE GENERATION .......................................................................................... 45 2.8.3 SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION ....................................................................................... 45 2.8.4 SOURCES OF WATER POLLUTION ................................................................................ 45 2.9 APPLICABLE RULES & REGULATIONS .......................................................................... 45

3. DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................ 47

3.1 PROJECT OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................... 47 3.2 HYDROGEOLOGY AND GEOMORPHOLOGY ................................................................ 47 3.2.1 GEO-HYDROLOGICAL STUDIES ..................................................................................... 47 3.2.2 GEOMORPHOLOGY.......................................................................................................... 47 3.2.3 RAINFALL & CLIMATE ...................................................................................................... 48 3.2.4 GEOLOGY .......................................................................................................................... 48 3.2.5 HYDROGEOLOGY ............................................................................................................. 49 3.3 LAND USE STUDIES ......................................................................................................... 49 3.3.1 OBJECTIVES ..................................................................................................................... 49 3.3.2 METHODOLOGY ............................................................................................................... 49 3.3.3 LAND USE BASED ON SECONDARY DATA ................................................................... 50 3.3.4 LAND USE BASED ON SATELLITE IMAGERY ................................................................ 50 3.4 SOIL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................ 55 3.5 METEOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS .................................................................................. 60 3.5.1 METHODOLOGY ............................................................................................................... 60 3.5.2 PRESENTATION OF DATA ............................................................................................... 60 3.5.3 WIND PATTERN ................................................................................................................ 61 3.6 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY .................................................................................................... 62 3.7 WATER QUALITY ASSESSMENT .................................................................................... 66 3.7.1 SURFACE WATER QUALITY ............................................................................................ 69 3.7.2 GROUND WATER QUALITY ............................................................................................. 71 3.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ..................................................................................................... 72 3.8.1 SOURCES OF NOISE ........................................................................................................ 72 3.8.2 NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS .................................................................................. 72 3.8.3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS ........................................................................................ 74 3.9 BIO DIVERSITY – FLORA AND FAUNA ........................................................................... 74 3.9.1 OBJECTIVES OF ECOLOGICAL STUDIES ...................................................................... 75 3.9.2 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR THE SURVEY ............................................................ 75 3.9.3 STUDY PERIOD ................................................................................................................. 75 3.9.4 SCOPE, AIM & OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................ 75 3.9.5 FIELD DATA COLLECTION / INVENTORY ...................................................................... 75 3.9.6 FOREST BLOCK WITH IN BLOCK AREA ......................................................................... 76 3.9.7 TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL STATUS: PRIMARY SURVEY ........................................ 76 3.9.8 STATUS OF TERRESTRIAL BIO DIVERSITY .................................................................. 78 3.9.9 AGRICULTURE .................................................................................................................. 84 3.9.10 FAUNA ................................................................................................................................ 85


Contents


3.9.10.1 MAMMALS .......................................................................................................................... 85 3.9.10.2 AVIFAUNA .......................................................................................................................... 85 3.9.10.3 REPTILES........................................................................................................................... 85 3.9.10.4 AMPHIBIANS ...................................................................................................................... 85 3.9.10.5 ANIMAL HUSBANDRY ....................................................................................................... 85 3.9.10.6 STATUS OF THREATENED AND ENDEMIC BIODIVERSITY ......................................... 87 3.9.10.7 HABITATS AND SENSITIVITY OF THE STUDY AREA .................................................... 87 3.9.11 AQUATIC ECOLOGICAL STATUS: PRIMARY SURVEY ................................................. 88 3.9.11.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................ 88 3.9.11.2 PLANKTON STUDY ........................................................................................................... 88 3.9.11.3 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR AQUATIC STUDIES .................................................. 88 3.9.12 CONCLUSION .................................................................................................................... 90 3.10 SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................... 91 3.10.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................ 91 3.10.2 DESKTOP STUDY ............................................................................................................. 91 3.10.3 METHODOLOGY FOR PRIMARY DATA COLLECTION .................................................. 91 3.10.3.1 HAMLET DETAILS ............................................................................................................. 92 3.10.3.2 DEMOGRAPHIC DETAILS ................................................................................................ 92 3.10.3.3 EMPLOYMENT PATTERN ................................................................................................. 92 3.10.4 INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES ...................................................................................... 93 3.10.4.1 EDUCATION FACILITIES .................................................................................................. 93 3.10.4.2 HEALTH FACILITIES: ........................................................................................................ 95 3.10.4.3 DRINKING WATER FACILITIES ........................................................................................ 95 3.10.4.4 DRAINAGE FACILITY ........................................................................................................ 95 3.10.4.5 COMMUNICATION FACILITY............................................................................................ 95 3.10.4.6 TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES ...................................................................................... 95 3.10.4.7 ROAD FACILITIES ............................................................................................................. 96 3.10.4.8 BANKING FACILITY ........................................................................................................... 96 3.10.4.9 POWER FACILITY ............................................................................................................. 96 3.10.4.10 MAIN COMMODITIES DETAILS ................................................................................ 96 3.10.5 NEED BASED ASSESSMENT ........................................................................................... 98 3.10.5.1 MAIN PROBLEMS AND NEEDS OF THE VILLAGES ...................................................... 98 3.10.5.2 CONCLUSION .................................................................................................................... 98 3.11 HAZARDS OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT AREA .......................................................... 98

4. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES ........................ 101

4.1 PREAMBLE ...................................................................................................................... 101 4.2 IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY ..................................................................... 101 4.3 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS ...................................................................................... 101 4.4 IDENTIFICATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES ............................................... 102 4.5 IDENTIFICATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS ..................................................... 102 4.6 AIR ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................ 103 4.6.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS ...................................................................................... 103 4.6.2 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS ............................................................................................ 104 4.6.3 PROPOSED MITIGATION MEASURES .......................................................................... 109 4.7 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................... 110 4.7.1 MATHEMATICAL MODEL FOR SOUND WAVE PROPAGATION DURING OPERATION 111 4.7.2 INPUT FOR THE MODEL ................................................................................................ 111 4.7.3 RESULTS & DISCUSSION .............................................................................................. 112 4.8 WATER ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................. 113 4.8.1 SOURCE FOR GROUNDWATER POLLUTION: ............................................................. 113 4.8.2 AQUIFER PROTECTION MEASURES ............................................................................ 114


Contents


4.9 WASTE GENERATION .................................................................................................... 115 4.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT – IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES .... 117 4.11 BIOLOGICAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY .............................................. 118 4.11.1 IDENTIFICATION OF EXTENT OF LIKELY IMPACT ZONE (LIZ) AREA ............... 118 4.11.2 IDENTIFICATION OF LIKELY IMPACTS ................................................................. 118 4.11.3 SCORING OF BIOLOGICAL CONSEQUENCES ..................................................... 118 4.11.4 QUANTIFYING THE PROBABILITY OF OCCURRENCE OF THE IMPACT .......... 119 4.11.5 QUANTIFYING BIOLOGICAL IMPACT .................................................................... 120 4.11.6 CATEGORIZATION OF INTENSITY OF BIOLOGICAL IMPACT ............................ 120 4.11.7 LIKELY IMPACTS ON BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT ............................................ 120 4.11.7.1. IDENTIFICATION OF EXTENT OF LIKELY IMPACT ZONE (LIZ) AREA ............... 120 4.11.7.2. IDENTIFICATION OF LIKELY IMPACTS ................................................................. 121 4.11.7.3. QUANTIFYING BIOLOGICAL IMPACT .................................................................... 121 4.11.7.4. MITIGATION MEASURES ........................................................................................ 122 4.12 SUMMARY OF IDENTIFIED IMPACTS AND PROPOSED MITIGATION MEASURES . 123

5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ............................................................................................ 127

5.1 ALTERNATE LOCATION FOR THE PROPOSED PROJECT ........................................ 127

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ..................................................................... 128 6.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 128 6.2 AIR QUALITY MONITORING ........................................................................................... 128 6.3 NOISE LEVEL MONITORING .......................................................................................... 128 6.4 WATER QUALITY MONITORING .................................................................................... 128 6.5 WATER QUALITY MONITORING .................................................................................... 128 6.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL ..................................................................... 129 6.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING COST ....................................................................... 129

7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES .......................................................................................................... 130 7.1. RISK ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................... 130 7.1.1. RAPID RISK ASSESSMENT APPROACH .................................................................. 130 7.1.1.1. RISK ANALYSIS RESULTS FOR EPS ........................................................................ 133 7.1.1.2. CALCULATION OF INDIVIDUAL RISK PER ANNUM (IRPA) .................................... 141 7.1.1.3. ANALYSIS RESULTS .................................................................................................. 141 7.1.1.4. COMPARISON WITH ALARP CRITERIA .................................................................... 142 7.1.1.5. OIL SPILL FREQUENCY ............................................................................................. 142 7.1.1.6. RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................................................ 143 7.2. EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN ............................................................................... 144 7.2.1. OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE ......................................................................................... 144 7.2.1.1. EMERGENCY RESPONSE ORGANISATION AND COMMUNICATION ................... 144 7.2.1.2. IDENTIFIED EMERGENCY SCENARIOS ................................................................... 145 7.2.1.3. EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION ............................................................................... 145 7.2.1.4. EMERGENCY RESPONSE ACTIVATION .................................................................. 145 7.2.2. DISASTER PREVENTION METHODS ........................................................................ 146 7.3. HEALTH AND SAFETY ................................................................................................ 146 7.3.1. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH .......................................................................................... 146 7.3.2. SAFETY ........................................................................................................................ 147

8. PROJECT BENEFITS ............................................................................................................. 153

8.1 BENEFITS FOR THE COUNTRY .................................................................................... 153 8.2 IMPROVEMENTS IN THE PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE .......................................... 153 8.3 IMPROVEMENT IN THE SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE ................................................. 153 8.4 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL ........................................................................................... 154


Contents


9. COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ................................................................................................... 155

10. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ................................................................. 156 10.1 PREAMBLE ...................................................................................................................... 156 10.2 EMP DURING VARIOUS PROJECT PHASES ................................................................ 156 10.3 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY OF THE COMPANY ........................................................... 156 10.4 ORGANISATION STRUCTURE - EHS & SAFETY ......................................................... 156 10.5 AUDIT AND REVIEW ....................................................................................................... 156 10.6 MANAGEMENT REVIEW ................................................................................................. 157 10.7 AIR ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................ 158 10.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................... 158 10.9 WATER ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................. 158 10.10 LAND ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................... 158 10.11 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN (WMP) ........................................................................... 158 10.12 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL AND SPOILS ............................................ 159 10.13 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN ............................................................................. 160 10.13.1 SELECTION OF PLANT SPECIES ........................................................................... 160 10.13.2 LOCATIONS OF GREENBELT ................................................................................. 160 10.13.3 RECOMMENDED SPECIES ..................................................................................... 160 10.13.4 PLANTATION TECHNIQUE ..................................................................................... 160 10.13.5 MONITORING PROTOCOL ...................................................................................... 161 10.14 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES ........................................................ 161 10.15 SITE SECURITY ............................................................................................................... 161 10.16 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND EMP COST161

11. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS ............................................................................... 162

11.1 LOCATION DETAILS OF THE PROJECT ....................................................................... 162 11.2 IMPORTANCE OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT ............................................................ 162 11.3 EPS CAPACITY ................................................................................................................ 162 11.3.1 INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIREMENT ..................................................................... 162 11.4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS......................................................................... 163 11.5 IMPACT ASSESSMENT .................................................................................................. 165 11.6 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN.......................................................................... 168 11.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM .............................................................. 168 11.8 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN ...................................... 168 11.9 PROJECT BENEFITS ...................................................................................................... 169 11.10 ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS OF IMPLEMENTATION OF EMP ................................... 169 11.11 CONCLUSIONS ............................................................................................................... 169

12. DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED ......................................................... 170

12.1 NAME OF THE CONSULTANTS ..................................................................................... 170

ANNEXURE I : MET DATA ........................................................................................................ 174 ANNEXURE II : AMBIENT AIR QUALITY DATA ....................................................................... 178 ANNEXURE III : HSE ................................................................................................................. 184 ANNEXURE IV : TOR ................................................................................................................ 190

TABLE OF FIGURES FIGURE 1: LOCATION MAP ........................................................................................................ 16 FIGURE 2: PROPOSED EPS SITE PHOTOGRAPHS ................................................................ 24 FIGURE 3: INDEX MAP ............................................................................................................... 19 FIGURE 4: EPS LOCATION GOOGLE MAP .............................................................................. 20


Contents


FIGURE 5: ENVIRONMENTAL SENSITIVITY MAP .................................................................... 21 FIGURE 6: TOPO MAP 1KM........................................................................................................ 22 FIGURE 7: TOPO MAP ................................................................................................................ 23 FIGURE 8: WELL INPUTS FOR EPS .......................................................................................... 33 FIGURE 9: BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR GAS PROCESSING FACILITY ............................................... 36 FIGURE 10: SCHEMATIC MEMBRANE BASED CO2 REMOVAL UNIT ......................................... 38 FIGURE 11: SCHEMATIC OF COMPACT DEW POINT DEPRESSION UNIT ................................. 40 FIGURE 12: SCHEMATIC OF MEMBRANE BASED NITROGEN REMOVAL UNIT .................. 41 FIGURE 14 : ANNUAL RAINFALL ............................................................................................... 48 FIGURE 15: LANDUSE LAND COVER ....................................................................................... 53 FIGURE 16: SATELLITE IMAGERY ............................................................................................ 54 FIGURE 17 : SOIL SAMPLING PHOTOS .................................................................................... 55 FIGURE 18 : SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS .............................................................................. 56 FIGURE 19 : WIND ROSE FOR STUDY PERIOD ...................................................................... 62 FIGURE 21 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LOCATIONS .................................................................... 64 FIGURE 20 : AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING PHOTOS ............................................... 63 FIGURE 22 WATER SAMPLING PHOTOS ................................................................................. 67 FIGURE 23 WATER SAMPLING LOCATION MAP ..................................................................... 68 FIGURE 24 NOISE MONITORING LOCATION........................................................................... 73 FIGURE 25 : NOISE MONITORING PHOTOS ............................................................................ 72 FIGURE 41 : SURVEY PHOTOGRAPHS .................................................................................... 76 FIGURE 42 : FLORA IN STUDY AREA ....................................................................................... 78 FIGURE 26 : STUDY AREA SE SURVEY PHOTOGRAPHS ...................................................... 97 FIGURE 28 : EARTHQUAKE MAP .............................................................................................. 99 FIGURE 29 FLOOD HAZARD MAP ............................................................................................. 99 FIGURE 30 : CYCLONE HAZARD MAP .................................................................................... 100 FIGURE 31 : CYCLONE HAZARD MAP .................................................................................... 100 FIGURE 32 : ISOPLETHS FOR INCREMENTAL GLCS OF NO2 AT EPS FOR SC-I ............ 106 FIGURE 33 : ISOPLETHS FOR INCREMENTAL GLCS OF NO2 AT EPS FOR SC-2 ............ 107 FIGURE 34 : ISOPLETHS FOR INCREMENTAL GLCS OF SO2 AT EPS FOR SC-2 ............. 108 FIGURE 35 : RAPID RISK ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY .................................................. 130 FIGURE 36 : ALARP CRITERIA ................................................................................................ 131 FIGURE 37 : EPS LAYOUT ....................................................................................................... 144

TABLES TABLE 1: PRODUCTION PROFILE OF BANTUMILLI FIELD ................................................................ 17 TABLE 2: ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES WITHIN 10-KM RADIUS OF PROJECT SITE .................... 18 TABLE 3: REGULATORY CLEARANCE OF PROJECT ......................................................................... 24 TABLE 4: STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT .............................................................................................. 25 TABLE 5: ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING ........................... 26 TABLE 6: TOR COMPLIANCE ................................................................................................................. 29 TABLE 7: WELL DISTANCES FROM PROPOSED LOCATION ............................................................. 34 TABLE 8: GAS COMPOSITION ................................................................................................................ 35 TABLE 9: PROCESS UNITS REQUIRED TO MEET PNGRB GUIDELINES ......................................... 35 TABLE 10: CO2 REMOVAL SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 37 TABLE 11: N2 REMOVAL PROCESS ..................................................................................................... 41 TABLE 12: COMPOSITION OF N2 UNIT REJECT GAS ........................................................................ 43 TABLE 13: GAS PROFILE FOR INTERNAL USE, SALES GAS & N2 UNIT REJECT GAS .................. 43 TABLE 14 : WATER REQUIREMENT - KLD ............................................................................................ 44 TABLE 15 : LEGISLATIVE FRAMEWORK .............................................................................................. 46 TABLE 16 : GEOLOGICAL SUCCESSION OF THE STUDY AREA ....................................................... 48 TABLE 17 : TABLE LANDUSE PATTERN IN STUDY AREA (IN HA) .................................................... 50 TABLE 18 : LAND USE/LAND COVER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM .................................................... 50


Contents


TABLE 19 : LULC AS PER SATELLITE IMAGERY ................................................................................. 52 TABLE 20 : SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS ............................................................................................ 55 TABLE 21 : SOIL QUALITY ..................................................................................................................... 57 TABLE 22 : SOIL STANDARD CLASSIFICATION .................................................................................. 57 TABLE 23:SENSITIVITY OF METEOROLOGY MONITORING EQUIPMENT ....................................... 60 TABLE 24 METEOROLOGICAL DATA FROM IMD (1971-2000) ........................................................... 61 TABLE 25 OBSERVED METEOROLOGICAL DATA ONSITE................................................................ 61 TABLE 26 : AIR MONITORING LOCATIONS ......................................................................................... 63 TABLE 27 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS (FOR 3 MONTHS STARTING FROM JANUARY 2018) .................................................................................................................................................................. 65 TABLE 28 SURFACE WATER LOCATIONS ........................................................................................... 66 TABLE 29 GROUNDWATER LOCATIONS ............................................................................................. 66 TABLE 30 : SURFACE WATER QUALITY .............................................................................................. 69 TABLE 31 : GROUND WATER QUALITY ............................................................................................... 70 TABLE 32: NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS ..................................................................................... 72 TABLE 33 SUMMARY OF MONITORED AMBIENT NOISE QUALITY .................................................. 74 TABLE 34 DETAILS OF TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS .............................. 76 TABLE 35 EXISTING FLORAL SPECIES IN THE PROPOSED PROJECT SITE .................................. 80 TABLE 36 PHYTOSOCIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF TREES IN STUDY AREA ..................................... 82 TABLE 37 PHYTOSOCIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF SHRUBS IN STUDY AREA .................................. 83 TABLE 38 : LIST OF AGRICULTURAL CROPS ..................................................................................... 84 TABLE 39 FAUNA RECORDED IN THE STUDY AREA ......................................................................... 86 TABLE 40 : AQUATIC FAUNA OF THE STUDY AREA .......................................................................... 86 TABLE 41 : PRAWNS AND CRABS REPORTED FROM THE PROJECT REGION ............................. 87 TABLE 42 : DETAILS OF AQUATIC SAMPLING LOCATIONS ................................................................ 88 TABLE 43 : PHYTOPLANKTON COUNT IN STUDY AREA ................................................................... 89 TABLE 44 : DISTRIBUTION OF CHLOROPHYLL-A (CHL A) MG/M

3 AND PRIMARY PRODUCTION

(PP) MG C / M3 DAY

-1 .............................................................................................................................. 89

TABLE 45 : ZOOPLANKTON BIOMASS (M-3

) AND NUMERICAL COUNTS (100/M3) .......................... 90

TABLE 46 : ADMINISTRATIVE DETAILS OF THE STUDY AREA ......................................................... 92 TABLE 47 : EDUCATION FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES ...................................................... 93 TABLE 48 : POPULATION AND LITERACY DETAILS ........................................................................... 93 TABLE 49 : EMPLOYMENT PATTERN ................................................................................................... 94 TABLE 50 : EMPLOYMENT & MAIN WORKER EMPLOYMENT PATTERN ......................................... 94 TABLE 51 : HEALTH FACILITIES IN NUMBERS ................................................................................... 95 TABLE 52 : DRINKING WATER FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES ............................................ 95 TABLE 53 : DRAINAGE FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES ......................................................... 95 TABLE 54 : COMMUNICATION FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES ............................................ 95 TABLE 55 : TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES .......................................... 96 TABLE 56 : ROAD FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES ................................................................. 96 TABLE 57 : BANKING FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES .......................................................... 96 TABLE 58 : POWER FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES .............................................................. 96 TABLE 59 : AAQ IMPACT IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................ 104 TABLE 60 : AIR EMISSION QUANTITIES............................................................................................. 106 TABLE 61 PREDICTED INCREMENTAL GLCS ................................................................................... 109 TABLE 62 RESULTANT INCREMENTAL GLCS ................................................................................... 109 TABLE 63: EXPECTED SOURCES OF NOISE .................................................................................... 112 TABLE 64 : ACCIDENTS IMPACTING GROUNDWATER & PREVENTIVE METHODS ..................... 114 TABLE 65 : OILY (HYDROCARBON) WASTE ..................................................................................... 115 TABLE 66: BIOLOGICAL CONSEQUENCES SCORING SCHEME ..................................................... 118 TABLE 67: OCCURRENCE FREQUENCY ASSESSMENT ................................................................. 120 TABLE 68: CATEGORIZATION OF BIOLOGICAL IMPACTS ............................................................... 120 TABLE 69: LIKELY IMPACTS ON BIOLOGICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................... 121


Contents


TABLE 70: BIOLOGICAL IMPACT SCORING ..................................................................................... 122 TABLE 71: LIKELY IMPACTS AND SUGGESTED MITIGATION MEASURES .................................. 123 TABLE 72 : CONSOLIDATED IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES FOR EPS .............................. 123 TABLE 73 : SUMMARY - MONITORING PROGRAMME...................................................................... 128 TABLE 74 : PRINCIPAL STUDY ASSUMPTIONS ................................................................................ 133 TABLE 75 : MAJOR ACCIDENT HAZARDS FOR EPS......................................................................... 133 TABLE 76 : ASSUMPTIONS FOR PASSING VEHICLE COLLISION TO EPS ..................................... 134 TABLE 77 : EVENT TREE FOR VEHICLE COLLISION TO EPS .......................................................... 135 TABLE 78 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR VEHICLE COLLISION TO EPS ....................... 135 TABLE 79 : ASSUMPTION FOR STRUCTURAL FAILURE OF EPS .................................................... 135 TABLE 80 : EVENT TREE FOR STRUCTURAL FAILURE STRUCTURAL FAILURE OF EPS ........... 136 TABLE 81 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL FAILURE OF EPS .................. 136 TABLE 82 : ASSUMPTIONS FOR NON PROCESS FIRES AT EPS .................................................... 137 TABLE 83 : EVENT TREE FOR NON PROCESS FIRES AT EPS ....................................................... 137 TABLE 84 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR NON PROCESS FIRES OF EPS ..................... 137 TABLE 85 : ASSUMPTIONS FOR HYDROCARBON LEAKS IN EPS .................................................. 138 TABLE 86 : EVENT TREE FOR HYDROCARBON LEAKS IN EARLY PRODUCTION SYSTEM OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................... 140 TABLE 87 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR HYDROCARBON LEAKS DURING WELL TESTING / EARLY PRODUCTION SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 140 TABLE 88 : RISK RESULTS .................................................................................................................. 141 TABLE 89 : INITIATING EVENTS LEADING TO TIER 1 OIL SPILL .................................................... 142 TABLE 90 : INITIATING EVENTS LEADING TO TIER 2 OIL SPILL .................................................... 142 TABLE 91 : INITIATING EVENTS LEADING TO TIER 3 OIL SPILL .................................................... 142 TABLE 92 : RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EPS...................................................................................... 143 TABLE 93: PLANT SPECIES SUGGESTED FOR GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT / PLANTATION .. 160


References


V) REFERENCES

Scheme conceptualization for modular surface facilities at BTSAD by IOGPT for ONGC

Census 2011

Checklist of Fishes from Interu Mangrove Swamp of River Godavari Region Andhra Pradesh, India

Environment impact Assessment Studies for Drilling of Development and Appraisal Wells in KG-ONN-2003/1 Onshore Block in Guntur and Krishna Districts, Andhra Pradesh, October 2008

EIA for 18 drilling wells of OIL Kakinada by Bhagavathi Ana Labs Private Limited

BALPL Data

"Mobile Platform Stability. Sub-project 0.6, Estimation of Damage Conditions". Det Norske Veritas, 1982

UK Department of the Oil and Gas Reserves of the United Kingdom (The Brown Book), 1990;

E&P Forum, Risk Assessment Data Directory, 1996

OISD-GDN-206- Guidelines on Safety Management System in Petroleum Industry

HSE Management System Document by CHSE (March 2013), ONGC

Development of 14 wells in Krishna District, Andhra Pradesh for ONGC 2017

CPCB 2000. Guidelines for developing green belts, Programme Objective Series PROBES/75/1999-2000. Central Pollution Control Board, New Delhi, pp. 195.

Environment Impact Assessment Report for Exploratory Drilling of Shale Gas and Oil Wells in KG Basin, Andhra Pradesh-2017.

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of Shrimp Culture in Andhra Pradesh. ASCI Journal of Management, Volume 25, 1996.

Environmental Impact Assessment Report on Development Drilling of 40 wells in KG Basin in East Godavari, West Godavari and Krishna districts of A.P., 2014. Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Ltd (A Govt. of India Enterprise), Rajahmundry Asset Rajahmundry-533106.

K. Nageswara Rao, 2003. Remote Sensing and GIS Applications in the Identification of Aquaculture Hotspots at Village Level. Journal of the Indian Society of Remote Sensing, Vol. 31, No. 2, 2003.

B. Mahadev, et. al., 2016. Precious medicinal plants found on the peripheries of villages of West Godavari district. Journal of Medicinal Plants Studies, 4(4): 80-83.

Prema Chandra Sekhar et al. 2015. Weed flora of crops fields of West Godavari district, Andhra Pradesh, India. Journal of Science / Vol 5 / Issue 12 / 1332-1336.

Priyavada Devi et. al. Quantitative and qualitative analysis of zooplankton from aquaculture ponds in and around Bhimavaram, West Godavari district. Nat Envir Pollut Technol. 2012, 11(3), 507-9.


Chapter 1 : Introduction


1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Preamble

Oil & Natural Gas Corporation (ONGC) proposing to establish one Early Production System (EPS) at BTSAD, Bantumilli South Field, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh. The envisaged gas production will be around 7 LSCMD. For early monetization of the gas of Bantumilli south field, ONGC is interested to install modular surface facilities at BTSAD. The processed gas is to be routed to common gas carrier of M/s.GAIL and hence to meet PNGRB guidelines. The Location map showing the Bantumilli South Field with the EPS location is provided in Figure 1.

FIGURE 1: LOCATION MAP

1.1 Purpose of the Report

As per the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14th September

2006, subsequent amendments of Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi, the proposed integrated project falls under ‘Category A Project’ under 1b type of activity. This EIA Report addresses the environmental impacts of the proposed project and proposes the mitigation measures for the same. The application to prior environmental clearance (Form-I) for the above proposal has been submitted to the MoEF&CC. Standard Terms of Reference (TOR) vide letter no: F.No.J-11011/75/2017-IA.II (I) dated 25th April 2017 and Additional TOR vide letter




no: F.No. J-11011/64/2017-IA.II(I) dated 31st May 2017 for the preparation of EIA/EMP Report. The copy of the same along with its compliance are enclosed in Annexure-I. The EIA report is prepared for obtaining Environmental Clearance (EC) from MoEF&CC, New Delhi for the proposed project. The report covers the primary data of existing baseline environmental status surrounding the project location collected during 29

th January 2018 – 22

nd April 2018. This report has been prepared for submission to

AP Pollution Control Board (APPCB) for conducting public hearing.

1.2 Importance of the Project to the Nation The proposed project is aimed at increasing the production towards filling the gap between national crude oil demand and supply. Also it will help in meeting the energy requirements of the nation and generate employment opportunities. Long term production profile for BTSAD is provided below for putting EPS.

TABLE 1: PRODUCTION PROFILE OF BANTUMILLI FIELD

S.No. Year No of

Producers

Gas Flow, Qg LSCMD

Annual Production

MMm3

Cum Prodn, MMm3

SBHP Ksc

Recovery %

1 2016-2017 2 5.00 182.50 182.50 727.8 2.24

2 2017-2018 4 7.00 255.50 438.00 682.4 5.38

3 2018-2019 4 7.00 255.50 693.50 640.0 8.52

4 2019-2020 4 7.00 255.50 949.00 600.4 11.66

5 2020-2021 4 7.00 255.50 1204.50 563.4 14.80

6 2021-2022 4 6.40 233.60 1438.10 531.7 17.68

7 2022-2023 4 5.75 209.88 1647.98 504.9 20.26

8 2023-2024 4 5.25 191.63 1839.60 481.4 22.61

9 2024-2025 4 4.80 175.20 2014.80 460.6 24.76

10 2025-2026 4 4.50 164.25 2179.05 442.3 26.78

11 2026-2027 4 4.10 149.65 2328.70 425.8 28.62

12 2027-2028 4 3.82 139.43 2468.13 411.2 30.34

13 2028-2029 4 3.58 130.67 2598.80 397.8 31.94

14 2029-2030 4 3.36 122.64 2721.44 385.3 33.45

1.3 Identification of Project Proponent & Project 1.3.1 Details

ONGC is India’s Top Energy Company and ranks 20th among global energy majors

(Platts). ONGC ranks 14th in ‘Oil and Gas operations’ and 220

th overall in Forbes Global

2000. Acclaimed for its Corporate Governance practices, Transparency International has ranked ONGC 26

th among the biggest publicly traded global giants.

It is one of the most valued public enterprise in India, and one of the highest profit-making and dividend-paying. ONGC has a unique distinction of being a company with in-house service capabilities in all areas of Exploration and Production of oil & gas and related oil-field services.

1.4 Brief Description of Project 1.4.1 Capacity

Project is aimed at early monetisation of the Oil & Gas resources available in the project location by establishing Early Production System (EPS) and the project output capacity is estimated to be 7 LSCMD. The project requires about 17.4 Acres of land which is already in possession of ONGC.




1.4.2 Cost of the Project Cost of the project is envisaged as Rs. 250 crores.

1.4.3 Location of the Project

The location of EPS is in BTSAD, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh. Bhimavaram Railway Station is at a distance of about 14 kms and Rajahmundry Airport is around 85 km from the project area. EPS is located at Coordinate 16° 25’ 15.1”N and 81° 29’ 57.8”E. The Proposed EPS will be Located in Barrivanipeta Village. Photograph of the proposed EPS Location is provided as Figure 2. Index Map is provided as Figure 3. The Environmental features of the project area within 10-km radius from the project site boundary are given in Table 2. Google Map is shown in Figure 4 and the Environmental Sensitivity Map is shown as Figure 5. Topomap of 1 km is shown as Figure 6. Topo Map with 10km study area is provided as Figure 7 and The 10 km’s radius of the study area falls in West Godavari Districts.

TABLE 2: ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES WITHIN 10-KM RADIUS OF PROJECT SITE

Sr. No. Particulars Details

1 Location

a Village Barrivanipeta

b Tehsil Bhimavaram

c District West Godavari

d State Andhra Pradesh

e Geographical co-ordinates 16° 25’ 15.1”N; 81° 29’ 57.8”E

2 Elevation 16ft

3 Meteorological conditions Nearest IMD: Narsapur

Wind Speed : 1-19 kmph

Wind Direction: SE, NE

Max. & Min. temp. 16oC – 40

oC

Rain fall 1055 mm

Relative Humidity 27-83 %

4 Land use at the project site Industrial Area

5 Nearest City / Town Bhimvaram

6 Nearest highway NH – 214A

7 Nearest Railway station Bhimavaram

8 Nearest airport Rajahmundry

9 Defence installations Nil

10 Archaeological important places

Nil

11 Surface water bodies Aquaculture ponds - Adjacent Upputeru River – 3.8 kms SW

12 Ecological Sensitive Areas (National Parks, Wildlife sanctuaries)

None

13 Reserved/Protected forests Nil

14 Industries ONGC & GAIL

15 Socio economic status of the project site

Land acquired by ONGC

16 Seismic zone Zone – III (moderate risk zone) as per IS:1893 (Part-1), 2002.


Chapter - 2: Production Description


FIGURE 2: INDEX MAP




FIGURE 3: EPS LOCATION GOOGLE MAP




FIGURE 4: ENVIRONMENTAL SENSITIVITY MAP




FIGURE 5: TOPO MAP 1KM




FIGURE 6: TOPO MAP




FIGURE 7: PROPOSED EPS SITE PHOTOGRAPHS

1.5 Status & Stage of Regulatory Clearances

Status and Stage of Regulatory Clearance for the proposed EPS is provided in Table 3.

TABLE 3: REGULATORY CLEARANCE OF PROJECT

Regulatory Clearance Status

Proposal Number IA/AP/IND/26860/2017

Terms of Reference F.No.J-11011/75/2017-IA.II (I)

1.6 Scope of the Study

Based on the TOR, the Environmental Impact Assessment report is prepared covering study area of 10-km radius area around the plant site. The scope of study broadly includes:

To conduct literature review and to collect data relevant to the study area;

To undertake environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline environmental status of the study area;

To identify the ambient air quality levels in the proposed project area;

To predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed project activities;

To evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted environmental impact assessment methodologies;

To prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for improving the environmental quality and scope for future expansions for environmentally sustainable development; and

To identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored. The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other sources.




M/s Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt Ltd.(A Bureau Veritas Group Company) undertook the environmental study during 29


nd April 2018 as per EIA guidelines laid

by MoEF&CC . The study has been carried out in an area of 10 Km radius area around the proposed EPS location.

1.7 Methodology / Approach

Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt. Limited along with ONGC officials had conducted a reconnaissance survey and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:

Predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded by India Meteorological Department (IMD), Narsapur;

Existing topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and rivers;

Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;

Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution pockets in the area;

Areas which represent baseline conditions; and

Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental attributes. Field studies have been conducted for a period of three months (29


nd

April 2018) representing Partly Winter and partly summer seasons to determine existing conditions of various environmental attributes as outlined in Table-5. The applicable environmental standards for the project and the methodology of monitoring and analysis are given in Chapter 3 and administrative legislation in Table 17. Environmental Impact Assessment study has been conducted within an area of 10 km radius around EPS. The various steps involved in the study for this project are divided into following three phases. Identification of significant environmental parameters and assessing the baseline status

within the study area and assessment of pollutants envisaged due to proposed activities and other polluting activities in the study area on various environmental parameters

Evaluation of impacts after superimposing the predicted pollution load over the baseline condition.

Preparation of Environmental Management Plan for mitigation of impacts. 1.8 Structure of EIA Report

Structure of EIA Report is provided in Table4.

TABLE 4: STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT

Chapter Title

Chapter – 1 Project Introduction

Chapter – 2 Project Description

Chapter – 3 Baseline Environmental Status

Chapter – 4 Environmental Impacts & Mitigation measures

Chapter – 5 Analysis of Alternatives (Technology & Site)

Chapter – 6 Environmental Monitoring Program

Chapter – 7 Additional Studies

Chapter – 8 Project Benefits

Chapter – 9 Environment Cost Benefit Analysis

Chapter – 10 Environmental Management Plan

Chapter – 11 Summary & Conclusions

Chapter – 12 Disclosure of Consultants Engaged




TABLE 5: ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING

Sr. No

Environmental Component

Sampling Locations

Sampling Parameters

Total Sampling Period

Sampling Frequency

Detection Limit Methodology

1 Meteorology One central location

Temperature, Wind Speed, Wind Direction

3 months Hourly WS: +/-0.02 m/sec WD: +/- 3 degrees Temp: +/- 0.2

oC

The meteorology parameters were recorded using automatic micro-meteorological equipment consisting of Anemometer, Wind wane and thermometer. Review of secondary data collected from IMD station at Narsapur

Rainfall 3 months Daily Rainfall: 0.2 mm Rainfall was recorded every morning at 0830 hours

Relative Humidity, Cloud Cover

3 months Hourly RH: +/- 3% Humidity recorded using wet and dry thermometer and psychometric charts on hourly basis.

2 Ambient Air Quality

6 locations As per NAAQS 2009

Two days per week for 12 weeks

24 hourly PM2.5: 5 µg/m3

PM10: 5 µg/m3

CO: 12.5 µg/ m3

SO2: 4 µg/ m3

NO2: 9 µg/ m3

Lead: 0.001 µg/ m3

Arsenic: 1 ng/ m3

Nickel :1 ng/ m3

Benzene :0.1ng/m3

Benzo-a-Pyrene : 1 ng/ m

3

HC: 0.1 µg/ m3

Ammonia: 5.0 µg/m3 Ozone: 20.0 µg/m3 Methane: 0.5 µg/m3 Non Methane:0.5 µg/m3

Gravimetric method for PM. Modified West & Gaeke method for SO2 (IS-5182 part-II 1969) using Tetrachloro mercurate 0.01 N absorbing solution. Jacob-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV 1975) for NO2 using Sodium Arsenate absorbing solution of 0.01 N absorbing solution. CO was measured by GC method. Benzo-a-pyrene by IS 5182 Part -12, Arsenic, Lead, Nickel by US-EPA Compendium method IO 3.5-1999, Benzene, Methane Hydrocarbon and Non Methane Hydrocarbon by USEPA-18 Method by spot sampling




Sr. No


Sampling Locations

Sampling Parameters


Sampling Frequency


3 Water Quality 11 locations (4 Surface water 7- Ground water)

As per IS:10500-1991

Grab sampling

Once in study period

EC:+/-0.1 us/cm TSS/TDS: 0.5 mg/l O&G: 0.1 mg/l DO: 0.5 mg/l BOD: 2 mg/l COD: 0.5 mg/l Ca, Mg, Na, K: 0.1 mg/l Alkalinity, PO4, SO4, Cl, NO3: 0.1 mg/l Coliform: 1 MPN

As per APHA methods. The conductivity, temperature were analysed at site laboratory and rest of the parameters were analysed at Bhagavathi Ana Labs Private Limited Laboratory at Hyderabad.

Heavy metals (As, Hg, Pb, Cd, Cr

-6, Total Cr,

Cu, Zn, Se, Fe)

Grab sampling


0.001 mg/l

4 Noise 3 locations Leq Hourly readings for 24 hours


SPL: 0.1 dB(A) Integrated on hourly basis

5 Soil 5 locations Soil profile, Chemical constituents, Suitability for agricultural growth

Composite sample up to 100- m depth

Once during study period

EC: ± 0.1 µs/cm N, P, K: 0.1 mg/kg

Analysis was carried out as per Soil Chemical analysis by ML Jackson

6 Terrestrial Ecology

Total study area

Flora and fauna Field observations


- Through field visits and collected secondary data. Count and quadrate method

7 Demography and Socio-economic aspects

Total study area

Demographic profile

- - - Through field visits and secondary information sources like National Informatic Centre, Delhi and Census operation division

8 Land Use Total study area

Trend of land use change for different categories

- - - Through field visits and secondary information of IRS, LISS P6 satellite imagery data sources like National Informatic Centre, Delhi




Sr. No


Sampling Locations

Sampling Parameters


Sampling Frequency


9 Geology Total study area

Geological history

- - - Secondary information sources (Geological survey of India and Central Ground Water Board, Delhi)

10 Hydrogeology (Surface and ground)

Total study area

Drainage pattern, nature of streams, aquifer characteristics, recharge and discharge areas

- - - Secondary information sources like (Geological survey of India and Central Ground Water Board)



29

1.9 ToR Compliance

MoEF&CC has issued approved Terms of Reference (TOR) for undertaking EIA Studies for EPS vide F.No.J-11011/75/2017-IA.II (I) dated 25th April 2017 and Additional TOR vide letter no : F.No. J-11011/64/2017-IA.II(I) dated 31st May 2017 in accordance with the provisions of Environmental Impact Assessment Notification dated 14-11-2006 in which now ONGC Intends to establish EPS. The ToR Compliance is provided in Table 6

TABLE 6: TOR COMPLIANCE

ToR No ToR Point ToR Compliance

1 Executive summary of a project. To enhance oil and gas production from existing reservoirs from the existing established oil and gas fields. ONGC is proposing for establishment of EPS in BTSAD, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District. The capital cost of the project is Rs 250 Crore Financial allocation for environmental protection measures will be 5% of the capital cost (i.e. Rs. 12.5 crores). The detail executive summary is provided.

2 Project description, project objectives and project benefits.

ONGC is establishing EPS in BTSAD, Bimavaram, West Godavari, Andhra Pradesh. EPS facilitates in production of Oil & Gas from nearby well network there by producing oil & gas without having a full scale refinery

3 Cost of project and period of completion.

The capital cost of the project is Rs 250 Crores Period of Completion is one and half year after obtaining all Clearances

4 Site details within 1 km of the each proposed well, any habitation, any other installation/ activity, flora and fauna, approachability to site, other activities including agriculture/ land, satellite imagery for 10km area. All the geological details shall be mentioned in the Topo sheet of 1:40000 scale, superimposing the well locations and other structures of the projects. Topography of the project site.

ONGC owns land of existing well BTSAD and proposes to set up the proposed EPS within the well location. 1km radius of the project consists of habitation of Barrivanipeta village, Jaganadhapuram Village, Aquaculture Ponds, Agricultural lands, two creeks, roads. Satellite Image is provided as Figure 14. Topomap is provided as Figure 5&6.

5 Details of sensitive areas such as National Park, Wildlife sanctuary and any other eco-sensitive area along with map indicating distance.

No sensitive areas such as National Park, Wildlife sanctuary and any other eco-sensitive area in 10 km’s of the study area.

6 Approval for the forest land from the State/ Central Govt. under Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, if applicable.

Not Applicable



30


7 Recommendation of SCZMA/ CRZ clearance as per CRZ Notification dated 6th January, 2011 (if applicable).

Sea shore is at 8.5-km from the project site boundary hence not Applicable

8 Distance from nearby critically/severely polluted area as per Notification, if applicable. Status of moratorium imposed on the area.

Not Applicable

9 Does proposal involve rehabilitation and resettlement? If yes, details thereof.

Not Applicable as the land is already procured by ONGC

10 Environmental considerations in the selection of the drilling locations for which environmental clearance is being sought. Present any analysis suggested for minimizing the foot print giving details of drilling and development options considered.

The proposed project is for the development of the block. The proposed EPS will be set up within BTSAD well Location to eliminate the additional land foot print.

11 Baseline data collection for air, water and soil for one season leaving the monsoon season in an area of 10 km radius with centre of Oil Field as its centre covering the area of all proposed drilling wells.

Baseline Data is collected for Ambient Air Quality, Water Quality and soil from 29

th

January to 22nd

April 2018

12 Climatology and Meteorology including wind speed, wind direction, temperature rainfall relative Humidity etc.

Climatology and Meteorology including wind speed, wind direction, temperature rainfall relative Humidity is provided in Chapter 3 Section 3.5

13 Details of Ambient Air Quality monitoring at 8 locations for PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2, CO, VOCs, Methane and non-methane HC.

Details of Ambient Air Quality monitoring at 6 locations for PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2, CO, VOCs, Methane and non-methane HC is Provided in Chapter 3 Section 3.6

14 Soil sample analysis (physical and chemical properties) at the areas located at 5 locations.

Soil sample analysis (physical and chemical properties) at the areas located at 5 locations is provided in Chapter 3 Section 3.4

15 Ground and surface water quality in the vicinity of the proposed wells site.

Ground and surface water quality in the vicinity of the proposed EPS site is provided in Chapter 3 Section 3.7

16 Measurement of Noise levels within 1 km radius of the proposed wells.

Noise levels are measured at 3 locations and 2 within 1 km radius of the proposed EPS and the same are provided in Chapter 3 Section 3.8

17 Vegetation and land use; flora/fauna in the block area with details of endangered species, if any.

Vegetation and land use; flora/fauna in the study area are provided in Chapter 3 Section 3.9

18 Incremental GLC as a result of DG set operation, flaring etc.

Incremental GLC as a result of DG set operation, flaring are provided in Chapter 4 Section 4.6

19 Potential environmental impact envisaged during various stages of project activities such as site

Potential environmental impact envisaged during various stages of project activities such as site activation,



31


activation, development, operation/ maintenance and decommissioning.

development, operation/ maintenance are provided in Chapter 4 and Section 4.3

20 Actual source of water and 'Permission' for the drawl of water from the Competent Authority. Detailed water balance, wastewater generation and discharge.

The water required will be supplied by local contractors through tankers from nearby villages, the contractor will obtain necessary permissions from local authorities, water balance for the activity is given in Chapter 2 Table 14

21 Noise abatement measures and measures to minimize disturbance due to light and visual intrusions.

Noise abatement measures and measures to minimize disturbance due to light and visual intrusions are provided in Chapter 4 Section 4.7

22 Details on wastewater generation, treatment and utilization /discharge for produced water/ formation water, cooling waters, other wastewaters, etc. during all project phases.

Details on wastewater generation, treatment and utilization /discharge for produced water/ formation water, cooling waters, other wastewaters, etc. during all project phases are provided in Chapter 2 and Section 2.7

23 Details on solid waste management for drill cuttings, drilling mud and oil sludge, produced sand, radio Active materials, other hazardous materials, etc. including its disposal options during all project phases.

Details on solid waste management for drill cuttings, drilling mud and oil sludge, produced sand, radio Active materials, other hazardous materials, etc. including its disposal options during all project phases are provided in Chapter 10 Section 10.11

24 Disposal of spent oil and lube. Spent oil & Lube oil will be collected stored and sent APPCB/CPCB authorized recyclers.

25 Storage of chemicals and diesel at site. Hazardous material usage, storage and accounting.

Zoning is carried out in the drill site and specific area is demarcated for storing Chemicals on site

26 Commitment for the use of water based mud (WBM) only

Not Applicable

27 Oil spill emergency plans for recovery/ reclamation.

ONGC has its own oil spill contingency plan and it will be followed in case of any emergency

28 H2S emissions control. H2S emissions control is provided in Chapter 7 Section 7.2

29 Produced oil/ gas handling, processing and storage/ transportation.

Produced oil/ gas handling, processing and storage/ transportation and provided in Chapter 2 Section 2.5.7 & 2.5.8

30 Details of control of air, water and noise pollution during production phase.

Details of control of air, water and noise pollution during production phase are provided in Chapter 4

31 Measures to protect ground water and shallow aquifers from contamination.

Measures to protect ground water and shallow aquifers from contamination is provided in Section 4.8.2 of Chapter-4.

32 Whether any burn pits being utilised for well test operations.

There will not be ant well testing in the proposed project. However, there will be a vertical flare stack proposed in the



32


EPS.

33 Risk assessment and disaster management plan for independent reviews of well-designed construction etc. for prevention of blow out. Blowout preventer installation.

Risk assessment and disaster management plan for individual wells has been prepared. Risk identification, quantification and DMP for the proposed EPS has been described in chapter 7

34 Environmental management plan. Environmental management plan is provided in chapter 10

35 Total capital and recurring cost for environmental control measures.

The capital cost of the project is Rs 250 Crore Financial allocation for environmental protection measures will be 5% of the capital cost (i.e. Rs. 12.5 crores).

36 Emergency preparedness plan. Emergency preparedness plan is provided in chapter 7 Section 7.2

37 Decommissioning and restoration plans.

Not Applicable

38 Documentary proof of membership of common disposal facilities, if any.

MOM with TSDF is already there for ONGC for Disposal of its hazardous wastes

39 Details of environmental and safety related documentation within the company including documentation and proposed occupational health and safety Surveillance Safety Programme for all personnel at site. This shall also include monitoring programme for the environmental.

Details of environmental and safety related documentation within the company including documentation and proposed occupational health and safety Surveillance Safety Programme for all personnel at site. This shall also include monitoring programme for the environmental are provided in Chapter 7 Section 7.3

40 A copy of Corporate Environment Policy of the company as per the Ministry's O.M. No. J-11013/ 41/2006-IA.II(I) dated 26

th April, 2011 available

on the Ministry's website.

Corporate Environment Policy of ONGC is Provided as Annexure III

41 Any litigation pending against the project and or any direction/order passed by any court of law against the project. If so details thereof.

No Litigations pending against the project and or any direction order passed by any court of law against the project

Additional ToR

1 Public Hearing to be conducted and issues raised and commitments made by the project proponent on the same should be included in EIA /EMP Report in the form of tabular chart with financial budget for complying with the commitments made.

MoEF&CC directions will be followed.



33

2. PROCESS DESCRIPTION

2.1 Production Plant Details

In Bantumilli South Field of Rajahmundry Asset, wells BTSAA (BTS#1) & BTSAB (BTS#2) have been drilled to establish hydrocarbon potential of Raghavapuram (3430-3460 m) & Nandigama (4165-4216 m) formation. Wells were declared as gas bearing and abandoned due to technical reasons. Further, 4 new well locations are identified as gas bearing namely BTSAD, BTSDA, BTSDB and BTSDC. The envisaged gas production will be around 7 LSCMD. For early monetization of the gas of Bantumilli south field, ONGC is interested to install modular surface facilities called Early Production System (EPS) at BTSAD. The processed gas is to be routed to common gas carrier of M/s.GAIL and hence to meet PNGRB guidelines. Project was referred to IOGPT for conceptualization of suitable surface facilities as part of field development programme. Wells and their flow for EPS is depicted in Figure 8.

FIGURE 8: WELL INPUTS FOR EPS

Gas Evacuation Line: Processed Gas will be exported through 8” pipeline of 47-km length to GAIL or direct to consumer via Lingala GGS at the destination Pressure of 35 kg/cm2.



34

2.2 Need for the Project The proposed project is aimed at increasing the production towards filling the gap between national demand and supply. Also it will help in meeting the energy requirements of the nation and generate employment opportunities.

2.3 EPS Capacity The envisaged peak gas production as per the profile is 7 LSCMD. Accordingly, EPS facilities at BTSAD have been conceptualised with design capacity of processing 7.0 LSCMD of gas, 135 m

3/d of condensate and 25 m

3/d of produced water.

2.4 Product storage and evacuation

The following are the storage facilities and transportation modes envisaged for the produce from the proposed EPS:

3 numbers of storage tanks are considered for storing the stabilised condensate produced at Bantumilli surface facility (3 X 150 m

3). Condensate will be evacuated

through road tankers to Tatipaka refinery.

2 numbers of effluent storage tanks (each of 50 m3 capacity) are considered for

storing the produced water and d will be evacuated through road tankers to nearby ETP.

Gas will be sent to GAIL by pipeline via Lingala GGS, which is around 47 km away from the installation.

2.4.1 Well details

The development plan includes 4 wells namely BTSAD, BTSDA, BTSDB & BTSDC and the Gas Processing Facilities are planned to be located near BTSAD. Distances of the wells from the proposed EPS location are shown in Table 7.

TABLE 7: WELL DISTANCES FROM PROPOSED LOCATION

Well Distance

BTSAD 0.045 km

BTSDA 1.53 km

BTSDB 1.17 km

BTSDC 2.90 km

These wells shall be connected to production manifold and test manifold through individual well fluid lines.

2.5 Technology & Process Description

2.5.1 Feed Composition

The gas composition considered as the governing case for conceptualization of proposed EPS surface facilities (as it contains higher percentage of CO2, N2 and C5+ components) is given in Table – 8.



35

TABLE 8: GAS COMPOSITION

Gas Composition Expected Gas Composition Components Mole%

Methane 60.84

Ethane 3.03

Propane 0.27

i-Butane 0.16

n-Butane 0.13

i-Pentane 0.17

n-Pentane 0.27

Hexanes 3.73

Carbon Di-oxide 14.96

Nitrogen 16.44

Compressibility Factor, Z 0.9968

Specific Gravity 0.8892

2.5.2 Product Specifications

Following are the products, which have been envisaged from the proposed facilities:

Sales Gas : Water and Hydrocarbon dew point of 00C

CO2 < 6%, Inert (N2 etc) < 8%

Condensate : Reid Vapour Pressure less than 12 psia With reference to the gas composition of different objects, the proposed gas processing facilities are listed in Table – 9.

TABLE 9: PROCESS UNITS REQUIRED TO MEET PNGRB GUIDELINES

Process Units

CO2 removal Unit √

GDU √

DPD √

N2 Removal Unit √

2.5.3 Scheme conceptualization

The surface facility conceptualised for development is as follows:

Two trains of separation units each of having a processing capacity of 3.5 LSCMD

Two trains of Gas conditioning system consists of CO2 and moisture removal, dew point control and nitrogen removal unit

One train for stabilisation of condensate and produced water

Associated utilities and offsite facilities.

2.5.3.1 Group header

The well fluid from each well shall be gathered in 8" group header at Gas Processing Facility. The group header & individual flow lines shall be having suitable isolation and shut down valves, temperature and pressure measurement and safety instruments for monitoring and control purposes.



36

2.5.4 Gas Processing Facilities

Centralised Gas Processing Facilities has been conceptualised near well BTSAD. With reference to the production profile, gas processing, condensate & effluent stabilisation and storage facilities are firmed up for the envisaged peak production of gas. From the vertical flow analysis and the flow assurance studies, it is evident that the flowing tubing head pressure (FTHP) estimated as 488- 195 kg/cm

2 for the entire life will be above

60 kg/cm2, and the temperature will be around 89 to 47°C.

At the Gas Processing Facility, the well fluid shall be received at a common group header/ manifold from the four wells and the details are as follows:

FIGURE 9: BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR GAS PROCESSING FACILITY

2.5.4.1 High Pressure Low Pressure Safety Valves

Since the reservoir pressure and flowing tubing head pressures are very high, for safe operations, individual wells will have high pressure—low pressure hydraulically operated safety valves. These valves are self-actuated and no need of external hydraulic power. Further, to drop /step down the pressure, three/four bean arrangement will be used optimally to flow the well fluid to the Gas Processing Facility through the well fluid lines.

2.5.4.2 Test Header

4" test header will be used for well testing purposes which will have temperature and pressure measurement and safety instruments. The test header may also be used for



37

activation purpose whenever required. The group header and test header will have provision for 6 wells.

2.5.4.3 Test separators

The individual wells will be tested in the three phase test separator of Gas Processing Facility. Separated gas, condensate & water will be routed for further processing. A simple block diagram for Gas Processing Facility is shown in Figure 9.

2.5.4.4 Separation

Two separation trains each of having a processing capacity of 3.5 LSCMD of gas is conceptualised. The well fluid from group header will be routed to a 3-phase HP separator 101A & 101B operated at a pressure of around 60 kg/cm

2. The excess pressure if any will be

routed to a 12-inch flare header through pneumatically operated backpressure control valve. The liberated gas from the separator is routed to HP gas KOD and gas filter before routed to the gas conditioning units, where gas will be treated for removing CO2 and moisture, heavier hydrocarbons and Nitrogen.

2.5.4.5 Gas Conditioning

Saturated gas from HP Separators will be routed to the gas conditioning section which consists of CO2 removal, Gas dehydration, DPD unit, and N2 rejection unit. I. CO2 Removal Unit Carbon dioxide present in the natural gas needs to be removed to increase the heating value of the gas, prevent corrosion of pipeline and gas process equipment and crystallization of CO2 during cryogenic process.

Membrane based system consisting of 2 units each having a capacity of 3.5 LSCMD. The broad specifications of the membrane module are as follows:

Inlet pressure: 60 kg/cm2g

Inlet Temperature: 30-45°C

Gas flow rate: 3.5 LSCMD

The outlet gas specification: CO2 < 2%, Water dew point: <0°C

The maximum pressure drop to be considered for the membrane scheme is 1 kg/cm2g.

Membrane Separation Process Membrane technologies potentially offer significant advantages over traditional gas separation operations. The features that make membrane technologies highly attractive for process separation units include the ability to separate chemical species without a phase change, low thermal energy requirements, simple process flow schemes with few rotary equipment, compact plant footprints and convenient start up and shutdown procedures. The details of the CO2 Removal System are given in Table-10.

TABLE 10: CO2 REMOVAL SYSTEM

Sl. No. Process Technology Membrane

1 Mechanism/phase change Permeation

2 Stage of deployment of technology Commercial

3 CO2 inlet concentration Up to 90%

4 CO2 outlet concentration Down to 1-2%



38


5 Simultaneous H2S removal Possible

6 Typical Operating conditions, P, kg/cm2

20-100

7 Temperature, °C < 60

8 Sweetened gas outlet Pressure, kg/cm2

20-100

9 Sweetened gas H2O Saturation Gas Dehydrated

10 Hydrocarbon Recovery/Losses 1 Stage: 8-15% 2 Stage: <2%

11 Acid gas outlet pressure, kg/cm2 <5.00

12 Footprint layout consideration Low

13 Main Equipment items Membrane module, Pre-treatment Module, Compressors (2+ stage processes) 14 Energy requirements Low-medium (feed gas and inter-stage compression)

15 Comparative process cost, CAPEX Medium

16 Comparative process cost, OPEX 1 Stage: low 2+ Stage: medium

Schematic diagram of CO2 removal unit is shown in Figure-10.

FIGURE 10: SCHEMATIC MEMBRANE BASED CO2 REMOVAL UNIT



39

The membrane modules can be used in number of stages to recover the hydrocarbon. It requires compression system and hence additional power and inter-stage cooling systems are mandatory.

Advantages:

Membrane has less weight and requires less space

It has high adaptability to variation in CO2 content of feed gas

Membranes are excellent dehydrators.

Membrane has limited / no moving parts Disadvantages:

Separated CO2 is at low pressure and requires additional compression for further use

Pre-treatment is required

II. Dew point depression

Dew point depression can be carried out by the use of compact liquid refrigerant techniques which requires less space as compared to conventional propane refrigeration packages. Skid mounted compact liquid refrigerant based DPD system consisting of 2 units each having a capacity of 3 LSCMD. The broad specifications of the membrane module are as follows:

Inlet Pressure: 59 kg/cm2g

Inlet temperature: 30-45°C

Outlet gas specification: Hydrocarbon dew point: 0°C at 55 kg/cm2g

Each DPD unit consist of following equipment

Process description: This scheme consist of three segments.

1. Refrigeration Loop consists of Compressors, exchangers, etc

2. MEG Loop consists of Accumulator, Pumps, exchangers, etc.

3. Gas Loop consists of Vertical KOD, exchangers, etc.

The refrigerant generally used for the above process is R-134A. Refrigerant shall be compressed to around 15 bar, followed by cooling through air cooled heat exchanger and then expanded to 1.5 bar by a JT valve. After expanding, the refrigerant will attain a temperature of around -15°C, which is used to cool the MEG solution to -11°C. The chilled MEG solution shall be circulated in an exchanger to achieve the incoming precooled gas to the hydrocarbon dew point of < 0°C. The chilled hydrocarbon gas will be routed to a KOD. The chilled gas from the KOD will be routed to an exchanger for cooling the incoming feed gas before leaving to N2 removal unit. The schematic is shown in the Figure 11.



40

FIGURE 11: SCHEMATIC OF COMPACT DEW POINT DEPRESSION UNIT

III. N2 Removal Unit

The N2 removal process includes cryogenic process, adsorption process and membrane process. Two stage membrane based nitrogen removal system is envisaged for the present scheme. Processed gas booster compressors are required to compress the hydrocarbon enriched product gas which will be coming out from the 1st stage of membrane. Similarly to recycle the hydrocarbon stream from 2nd stage to inlet of the membrane system booster compressors are required. Gas engine driven compressor system with air cooled heat exchangers are envisaged to cool the compressed gas. The compressed sales gas as per pipeline specification is routed to the GAIL gas grid through a 47 km x 8" pipeline.

Skid mounted membrane based Nitrogen removal system consisting of 2 units each having a capacity of 3 LSCMD. The broad specifications of the membrane module are as follows: Inlet pressure: 58 kg/cm

2g

Inlet Temperature: 30-45°C

Gas flow rate: 3 LSCMD The outlet gas specification: N2 < 8% Outlet pressure: 56 kg/cm

2

Membrane

In this process, nitrogen rich stream will be rejected and a hydrocarbon rich stream will pass through the membrane as permeate. It is a two stages system to achieve higher hydrocarbon recovery. The flexibility of the membrane system allows for significant variations in inlet gas compositions and flow rate while achieving desired product specification. The processes for N2 removal are given in the Table 11.



41

TABLE 11: N2 REMOVAL PROCESS


1 Mechanism/phase change Permeation

2 Stage of deployment of technology Commercial up to

25 MMSCFD

3 N2 inlet concentration Up to 90%

4 5

N2 in CH4 rich product gas 1 stage bulk

separation only 2+ stages <4%

6 Typical Flow Rate, MMSCFD 0.5-25

7 Hydrocarbon Recovery/Losses 1 Stage: High 2+ stages <2% 8 Footprint layout consideration Low

9 Main Equipment items

Membrane module Pre-treatment modules

10 Energy requirements -

11 Comparative process cost, CAPEX Medium

Comparative process cost, OPEX Medium

The block diagram of the membrane system is shown in the Figure 12.

FIGURE 12: SCHEMATIC OF MEMBRANE BASED NITROGEN REMOVAL UNIT

2.5.5 Condensate stabilization, storage and evacuation

The condensate from HP separators shall be heated to 40°C and routed to condensate separator which will be operating at 5 kg/cm2. The flue gases from the gas fired turbine can also be utilised for heating of condensate. Further the condensate is pumped to condensate storage tanks after stabilising in condensate stabiliser which will be operating at a pressure of 1.3 kg/cm2. The liberated gas from the condensate separator is compressed and sent to CO2 removal unit.



42

The stabilized condensate will be stored in condensate storage tanks (3 no’s x 150 m3 capacity) at Gas Processing Facility. From the tanks, condensate will be loaded in road tankers for further transportation to Tatipaka refinery. A tanker loading bays (3 no’s) have been provided with condensate loading pumps.

2.5.6 Off gas compressor The gas liberated from the condensate separator shall be compressed from 5 kg/cm

2 to

60 kg/cm2 and fed to the CO2 removal unit. The off gas compressors shall be gas engine

driven compressors with air cooled heat exchangers having a capacity of 15000 SCMD.

2.5.7 Gas supply

Processed Gas will be exported through 8"x 47 km pipeline to GAIL or direct to consumer via Lingala GGS at the destination Pressure of 35 kg/cm2g.

2.5.8 Produced water storage and evacuation

The produced water from the HP separators is routed to effluent stabiliser and further stored in the effluent storage tanks. From the tanks by means of effluent loading pumps, effluent will be loaded in road tankers for further transportation to nearest ETP.

2.5.9 Utilities Requirement for Gas Processing Facility

The required utilities such as power, instrument air, raw water etc. for the proposed Gas Processing Facilities are summarized below:

2.5.9.1 Plant/Instrument Air A total of 500 m

3/hr capacity air compressor and associated facilities are envisaged

2.5.9.2 Power Requirement

The total capacity of power generation facilities of Gas fired Power Plant have been envisaged to be around 0.5 MW considering the start-up and peak load requirements.

2.5.9.3 Raw/Service Water

Raw water requirement is considered as 20 m

3/day consisting of 2 tanks each of 25 m

3

capacity.

2.5.9.4 Loading system & Weigh Bridge package Loading system and Weigh Bridge is a package item. There are 3 condensate loading bays and 2 effluent loading bays with loading arms.

2.5.9.5 Fuel gas system

The rejected gas from nitrogen removal unit is routed to the fuel gas system as the main source. However, provision from suitable other sources such as separators will also be made for uninterrupted fuel gas supply. The fuel gas system will have gas heater, fuel gas KOD and distribution system.



43

2.5.9.6 Firefighting system Firefighting system consists of fire water storage tanks, jockey pumps, diesel driven fire water pumps, foam distribution system and other necessary accessories as recommended and required by the standards. The system is well defined to meet the industry standards and consists of Diesel storage for emergency generator and fire water pumps and distribution system.

2.6 Gas profile for sales, internal use:

The rejected gases from the N2 rejection unit shall be utilised as fuel to the gas engine based compressors and gas based power plant. The tentative fuel gas composition is given in Table 12.

TABLE 12: COMPOSITION OF N2 UNIT REJECT GAS

Components C1 C2 C3 i-C4 n-C4 i-05 n-05 n-C6 CO2 N2 H2O

Mole Fraction 0.525 0.025 0.002 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.003 0.026 0.417 0

The gas production profile, sales gas & gas required for internal use is shown in Table 13.

TABLE 13: GAS PROFILE FOR INTERNAL USE, SALES GAS & N2 UNIT REJECT GAS

Sr. No.

Year Gas Production

Rate, LSCMD

Sales gas,

LSCMD

N2 unit reject gas, LSCMD (41.7% N2

content)

Internal Gas Use, LSCMD 1 2016-17 5 2.63 1.46 0.57

2 2017-18 7 3.69 2.04 0.80

3 2018-19 7 3.69 2.04 0.80

4 2019-20 7 3.69 2.04 0.80

5 2020-21 7 3.69 2.04 0.80

6 2021-22 6.4 3.37 1.87 0.73

7 2022-23 5.75 3.03 1.68 0.66

8 2023-24 5.25 2.76 1.53 0.60

9 2024-25 4.8 2.53 1.40 0.55

10 2025-26 4.5 2.37 1.31 0.51

11 2026-27 4.1 2.16 1.19 0.47

12 2027-28 3.82 2.01 1.11 0.44

13 2028-29 3.58 1.89 1.04 0.41

14 2029-30 3.36 1.77 0.98 0.38

15 2030-31 3.2 1.69 0.93 0.37

Around 3.69 LSCMD of processed gas will be available for sales as per pipeline specification during peak production. However, the reject gas quantity from the N2 removal unit will be approximately 2.04 LSCMD having calorific value of 4880 kcal/m

3. The

maximum fuel gas quantity required will be 0.8 LSCMD for gas engine driven compressors and utility power requirement in the Gas processing facilities. Remaining 1.24 LSCMD reject gas from the N2 removal unit may be further utilised for other internal uses / sales.



44

2.7 Resource Requirement

2.7.1 Land Requirement

The land requirement for proposed EPS process facilities at Bantumilli South will be 17.4 acres (210 m X 335 m i.e. 70350 m

2).

2.7.2 Water requirements

2.7.2.1 Source of Water and its management

Water will either be sourced from water well bore or tanker water Supply. Water requirement of approximately 20 m3/D is required for EPS. Associated water from produced water will be collected, separated and treated through Effluent Treatment Plant which will be further utilised for Green belt. The water requirement in EPS is mainly cooling and domestic use. Produced water storage and loading bay facilities to transfer produced water to Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms. Waste Oil/Spent oil shall be sent to the Authorized Recyclers. The details of water requirement are given in Table 14

TABLE 14 : WATER REQUIREMENT - KLD

Sl. No

Description Water required Wastewater

generation Fresh Water (M3/D) Treated (M

3/D) Total water (M

3/D)

1 Cooling 15 - - 3.5

2 Domestic 5 - 5

Total 20 - 5 3.5

Effluent Water The treated effluent will have the following characteristics

pH : 6.5 – 8.5

Oil & Grease : < 50 ppm

TSS : < 100 ppm

2.7.3 Workforce Arrangements

During Construction Phase, the Manpower Requirement is 25 persons. The EPS will be operated by approx. 8 persons per shift. The manpower will operate in two shifts with continuous operations.

2.7.4 Power Requirement at EPS

The total capacity of power generation facilities of Gas fired Power Plant have been envisaged to be around 0.5 MW considering the start-up and peak load requirements.

2.7.5 Chemical storage The EPS will have normal storage facilities for fuel oil, required chemicals and the necessary tubulars and equipment. The storage places will be clearly marked with safe operating facilities and practices.



45

2.7.6 Logistics Crew transfers to and from the EPS, materials, diesel and chemicals will be through light vehicles, trucks and trailers.

2.8 Sources of Pollution 2.8.1 Noise Generating Sources

The main noise generating sources at the EPS site are Gas Engines and intermittent noise generation from office and stores activities, pumps, compressors, flares, Exchangers, vent and vehicular movement. The impact of noise emissions is minimized by acoustic enclosures.

2.8.2 Solid Waste Generation

The solid waste generated from the proposed project will be only in form of domestic municipal waste. Major sources of solid waste at the proposed EPS will be construction waste, waste oil and other domestic waste.

Clearing of vegetation is not applicable as the site is already under the posession of ONGC and is already brought into Industrial use due to the existing well.

Construction & Demolition (C&D) waste generation during the construction phase requires proper disposal.

Spillages, if any; Waste oil generation can contaminate soil if not treated and disposed properly

Domestic waste can contaminate soil, release air emissions and odour, create public nuisance and cause various diseases, if not contained and managed well

2.8.3 Sources of Air Pollution

The major source of air pollution during the proposed EPS operation will be continuously operating Gas Engines and Flare Stack. Each stack will be provided with adequate stack height for easy dispersion of gaseous emissions. Technical flaring is required. The flaring will result in emissions of CO2, water vapours, NO2 and other trace gases in case of natural gas flaring and particulates in case crude oil is flared. It is assumed that the occurrence of SO2 in the flare gas would be in traces or negligible. Flare stack will be 30 mts height. The associated vehicular movement will also result in dust pollution along the approach roads.

2.8.4 Sources of Water Pollution The sources of water pollution are from waste oil, domestic utilisation and spills. Process water will be collected and treated in the ETP. Proper drainage system will be maintained at EPS Site for collecting the effluent water. Produced water storage and loading bay facilities are provided to transfer produced water to Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms.

2.9 Applicable Rules & Regulations The comprehensive list of Acts, Rules, Regulations and Notifications are guided by the

proposed exploratory wells is given in Table 15.



46

TABLE 15 : LEGISLATIVE FRAMEWORK

S. No Description

ACTS

1 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974.

2 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981

3 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

4 The Motor Vehicle Act, 1988

5 Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991.

6 The Explosives Act 1984

7 The Petroleum Act 1934

RULES & NOTIFICATIONS

1 Ozone Depleting Substances (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000.

2 Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001

3 EIA Notification, dated 14th September 2006.

4 Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) (Amendment) Rules, 2010.

5 Hazardous and other Wastes (Management and trans-boundary movement) Rules,

2016.

6 E – Waste Management Rules 2016.

7 Bio medical waste management rules, 2016

8 Solid waste management Rules 2016.

9 Plastic waste management rules 2016.

10 Construction and demolition waste management rules 2016.

11 Regulation of Polychlorinated Biphenyls Order, 2016.

12 Notification on Fly Ash, dated 25.01.2016.

13 EIA Notification, dated 14th September 2006.

14 The Petroleum Rules 2002

15 Petroleum and Natural Gas Rules, 2009

ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS

1 Ambient Air Quality Standards W.R.T of Noise for different Areas/Zones, dated 1

st

July 1999.

2 Ambient Air Quality Standards, dated 18th November 2009

3 Standards for Sewage Treatment Plant, dated 24th November 2015.

4 Diesel Generator Standards, 1986.


Chapter 3 : Description of Environment

47

3. DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT 3.1 Project Overview

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study area covers 10-km radius around the proposed EPS facility at BTSAD in Bantumilli South Field, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District of Andhra Pradesh. The 10-km radius area around the proposed EPS facility, description of biological environment and Human environment such as environmental settings, demography & socio-economics, land-use/land cover, ecology & biodiversity have been carried out during study period. However, as a universally accepted methodology of EIA studies, physical environmental attributes such as Ambient Air Quality, Water Quality, Soil Quality, Noise Levels, Physiography, Hydrology, Odour, Solid Waste Generation have been studied at selective locations representing various land uses such as industrial, rural/residential, commercial and sensitive locations including the densely populated areas, agricultural lands, forest lands and other ecologically sensitive areas, if any falling within block area. The existing environmental setting is considered to know the baseline environmental conditions, which are described with respect to climate, hydro-geological aspects, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality, ecology, land use and socio-economic profiles of people. The baseline studies are carried out in winter season covering 29

th

January 2018 – 22nd

April 2018.

3.2 Hydrogeology and Geomorphology

3.2.1 Geo-Hydrological Studies ONGC is proposing to establish Early Production System (EPS) at BTSAD, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh. In order to assess the likely impacts from this facility on soils, ground water & surface water environs studies were conducted by focusing the Hydrogeological conditions in and around the project site. The details of the study are presented below.

3.2.2 Geomorphology Proposed site area lies near the sea coast of Bay of Bengal. Physiographical the study area & its surroundings are divided into three geomorphological features viz., Younger Coastal Plains, Older Deltaic Plain, Active Flood Plains. The major landforms in study area are marine origin. The marine landforms including palaeo beach ridges, paleotidal flats, active beach and spit. These formation speared average distance of 5 km from the Bay of Bengal along the coast stretch. Active flood plains are observed along the Upputeru River. Topographically the study area is less flat with local undulations. The altitudes of land surface vary from 10 m above in west to sea level in the east The different types of soil are encountered in study area are deltaic alluvial soils and coastal sands. Deltaic soils are very deep and highly fertile. These are seen mostly around the river stretch. The coastal sands are seen occurring as along coast.



48

3.2.3 Rainfall & Climate The study area and its surroundings is tropical humid type of climate with oppressive summer season and good seasonal rainfall. The summer season extends from March to May followed by southwest monsoon season, which lasts till September. October and November constitute the post monsoon or retreating monsoon season. December to February months experience cold weather condition. The average rainfall of the study area & its surroundings for the last 5 years (2013 t0 2017) is 1055 mm.

FIGURE 13 : ANNUAL RAINFALL

3.2.4 Geology The district is underlain by different geological formations comprising oldest Archaeans to Recent Alluvium. The rock types are classified as consolidated, semi-consolidated and unconsolidated formations. The consolidated formations include khondalites, charnockites & granitic gneisses of Archaean group, Deccan traps of Tertiary period. The semi consolidated formations are represented by tertiary and upper Gondwana formations like Rajahmundry & Tirupati sandstones and unconsolidated formations comprise deltaic and river alluvial deposits of Quaternary period. Geologically, the proposed site and its surroundings are covered with Quaternary Alluvium of coastal origin and is acting as top surface layer. The alluvium is mainly composed of Sand, Silt and Clay with varying depths in different locations on all along the narrow coastal stretch of the area. These sandy coastal soils are saline. The general geological succession of study area given below Table 16.

TABLE 16 : GEOLOGICAL SUCCESSION OF THE STUDY AREA

Age System Formation Lithology

Recent to Sub-Recent

Alluvium Gravel, Sand, silt and clay Laterite

Unconformity

Mio-Pliocene Rajahmundry Conglomerate ferruginous, sandstone and clays

Upper Cretaceous to Lower Eocene

Deccan Traps Basalt, Inter trappean beds and intra trappean marl and shales

700800900

100011001200130014001500

2013 2014 2015 2016 2017

Rai

nfa

ll in

mm

Years

Annual Rainfall of Study Area and Its Surroundings

Annual Rainfall Two Years Moving Average



49

Age System Formation Lithology

Lower Cretaceous to Lower Triassic

Upper Gondwana

Tirupathi Gritty and Ferruginous sandstone and clays

Raghavapuram Sandstone, shale and conglomerate

Gollapalli Sandstone and shale

Lower Gondwana

Chintalapudi Sandstone, shale and clays

Unconformity

Archaean Khondalites, Charnockites, Granites & Gneisses

3.2.5 Hydrogeology

Groundwater occurs in all most all geological formation and its potential depends upon the nature of geological formations, geographical setup, and incidence of rainfall, recharge and other hydrogeological characters of the aquifer. In study area groundwater occurs in semi consolidated & unconsolidated formations. The study area and its surroundings are occupied by unconsolidated formations comprising coastal and deltaic river alluvium and wind blow sand deposits the ground water is developed mostly through dug wells ranging in depth from 3.0 to 11.0 m bgl. Irrigation dug wells varies from 4.50 to 8.50 meters with 1.5 to 5.0 lps. However, the depth of fresh water aquifers varies considerably from place to place. In deltaic area ground water occurrence is controlled by landforms. In deltaic area also a lot of heterogeneity in hydrogeological conditions exist both spatially and vertically. Fresh water is generally limited to shallow to moderate depths only, deep aquifers are generally saline. Palaeo channels are favourable locations for fresh water aquifers. Ground water occurs under phreatic to confined conditions and is developed through shallow dug wells, filter point wells and shallow tube wells. The depth of dug wells ranges from about 2 to 7 m, while the depth of filter point wells varies from 5 to 13 m and the depth of tube wells varies from 40 to 80 m.

3.3 Land Use Studies

Studies on land use aspects of eco-system play important roles for identifying sensitive issues, if any, and taking appropriate actions for maintaining the ecological balance in the development of the region.

3.3.1 Objectives The objectives of land use studies are:

To determine the present land use pattern;

To analyse the impacts on land use due to plant activities in the study area; and

To give recommendations for optimizing the future land use pattern vis-a-vis growth of plant activities in the study area and its associated impacts.

3.3.2 Methodology

For the study of land use, literature review of various secondary sources such as District Census Handbooks, regional maps regarding topography, zoning settlement, industry, forest etc., were taken. The data was collected from various sources like District Census Handbook, Revenue records, state and central government offices and Survey of India (SOI) Top sheets and also through primary field surveys.



50

3.3.3 Land use Based on Secondary Data

The land use pattern in the Village Directory conform to the pattern of classification of land use as recommended by the Ministry of Agriculture, Government of India. The Ministry has recommended the maintenance of records of land use pattern under the 9 categories as indicated in the district census handbook. Land use pattern described total land area of villages falling under the study area map. The details of land use pattern of 9 villages has been taken from district census handbook 2011 of Andhra Pradesh. Total Area 309.057 Sq.Km.

TABLE 17 : TABLE LANDUSE PATTERN IN STUDY AREA (IN HA) Total Geographical Area

Area under Non-Agricultural Uses

Barren & Un-cultivable Land Area

Permanent Pastures and Other Grazing Land Area

Land Under Miscellaneous Tree Crops etc. Area

Cultivable Waste Land Area

Fallows Land other than Current Fallows Area

Current Fallows Area

Net Area Sown

9928 1340.41 141.9 30.18 946.38 598 0 0 4676.43

Source: District census handbook 2011, district West Godavari, AP

Land under Cultivation The study area does not have any irrigated land. The un-irrigated land measures about 1340.41 ha and works out to about 70.38% of the total study area.

Cultivable Waste This land includes which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant during the past 5 years in succession. Such lands may either be fallows or covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. Lands under thatching grass, bamboo bushes, other grooves useful for fuel etc., and all grazing lands and village common lands are also included in this category. The study area comprises about 9.61% cultivable wastelands.

Land not available for Cultivation The land not available for cultivation is 20.01% of the total study area.

3.3.4 Land Use Based on Satellite Imagery

Remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and interpreted for the BTSAF area for analysing the land use pattern of the study area. Based on the satellite data, land use/ land cover maps have been prepared.

Land use/Land Cover Classification System The present land use/ land cover maps were prepared based on the classification system prescribed by MoEF for the Oil and Gas Exploration projects. For explanation of each of the land use category, the details as given in Table-18 were considered.

TABLE 18 : LAND USE/LAND COVER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Level I Level II Level III

1. Built-up land

1.1. Built-up land

1.1.1. Settlements

1.1.2. Industry/Institutional area

2. Agricultural land

2.1. Cropped land 2.1.1. Double cropped

2.1.2. Karif irrigated

2.1.3. Karif un-irrgated

2.2. Fallow -

2.3. Plantation -

3. Forest 3.1. Evergreen/Semi- 3.1.1. Dense



51

Level I Level II Level III

evergreen

3.2. Degraded scrub land -

3.3. Forest blank

3.3.1. Degraded forest

3.3.2. Forest blank

3.4. Forest plantation -

4. Waste land

4.1. Marshy/Swampy land -

4.2. Land with or without scrub -

4.3. Sandy area (coastal) -

4.4. Barren rocky/stony waste/sheet rock areas -

5. Water bodies

5.1. River/Stream -

5.2. Lake/'reservoir/tank/canal -

5.3. Bay of Bengal -

6. Others

6.1. Shifting cultivation 6.1.1. Current

6.2. Mining area

6.2.1. Quarry/mining area

6.2.2. Mining/Industrial dump

Data Requirements IRS Resourcesat-2 LISS3 dated 31

st January 2018 was acquired for land use pattern and

was used for the mapping and interpretation. Besides, other collateral data as available in the form of maps, charts, census records, other reports and especially topographical survey of India maps are used. In addition to this, ground truth survey was also conducted to verify and confirm the ground features.

Methodology The methodology adopted for preparation of land use/ land cover thematic map is monoscopic visual interpretation of geocoded scenes satellite image and colour cartographic map will be developed based on field observations. The various steps involved in the study are preparatory field work, field survey and post field work.

Prefield Interpretation of Satellite Data The False Colour Composite (FCC) of IRS Resourcesat-2 LISS3 satellite data has been used for prefield interpretation work. Taking the help of top sheets, geology, geomorphology and by using the image elements the features are identified and delineated the boundaries roughly. Each feature is identified on image by their image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape, size, pattern and association. A tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use, physiography and erosion was formulated. The sample areas for field check are selected covering all the physiographic, land use/land cover feature cum image characteristics. Ground Truth Collection Both top sheets and imagery were taken for field verification and a transverse plan using existing road network was made to cover as many representative sample areas as possible to observe the broad land use features and to adjust the sample areas according to field conditions. Detailed field observations and investigations were carried out and the land use features are noted on the imagery.

Post Field Work The base maps of the study area were prepared with the help of Survey of India top sheets. Preliminary interpreted land use and the land cover features boundaries from IRS



52

Resourcesat-2 LISS3 False Colour Composite were modified in light of field information and the final thematic details were transferred onto the base maps. The final interpreted and classified thematic map was carto graphed. The cartographic map was coloured with standard colour coding and detailed description of feature with standard symbols. All the classes noted and marked by the standard legend on the map.

Final Output The final output would be the land use/land cover map numerals which were given different colour code for each category as shown in map. Area estimation of all features of Land use/Land cover categories was noted.

Observations The following are the main interpreted land use/land cover classes of the study area and their respective extent are given in hectares.

TABLE 19 : LULC AS PER SATELLITE IMAGERY

Class Subclass Area in Hact

Agriculture

Crop Land 802.24

Double Crop 1634.381

Fallow Land 123.861

Plantation 3194.201

Built-up Rural 1023.217

Forest Mangroves 186.099

Waste Lands Sandy Area 93.708

Scrub Land 318.889

Water Bodies

Aqua Culture Ponds 18279.965

Canal 337.253

River 3087.885

Sea 1670.997

Stream 40.528

Water Bodies 32.368

Wet Lands Swamp 588.267

Wet Lands 240.752

Grand Total 31654.611



53

FIGURE 14: LANDUSE LAND COVER



54

FIGURE 15: SATELLITE IMAGERY



55

3.4 Soil Characteristics Soil quality is the capacity of a specific kind of soil to function, within natural or managed ecosystem boundaries, to sustain plant and animal productivity, maintain or enhance water and air quality and support human health and habitation. Soil quality reflects how well a soil performs the functions of maintaining biodiversity and productivity, partitioning water and solute flow, filtering and buffering, nutrient cycling and providing support for plants and other structures. Thus, soil quality plays vital role in any particular geographical phenomenon of ecology as well as physico-chemical environment. The soil quality locations is given in Table 20, and soil sampling results is given in Table 21, soil standard classification is given in Table 22. Soil sampling Photos are provided in Figure 16 and Soil sampling Location map is provided in Figure 17.

TABLE 20 : SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Sampling Location Longitude Latitude

S1 Nagendrapuram 16.4231 81.4958

S2 Nagidipalem 16.4069 81.4925

S3 Project Site 16.4208 81.4997

S4 Dirusummaru 16.4722 81.515

S5 Gollavanithippa 16.4569 81505

FIGURE 16 : SOIL SAMPLING PHOTOS



56

FIGURE 17 : SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS



57

TABLE 21 : SOIL QUALITY

S.No Parameters Units S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

1 Texture ---- clay Clay

Loamy Sand clay clay

a Sand % 8 12 76 10 8

b Silt % 7 10 9 8 8

c Clay % 85 78 15 82 84

2 Bulk Density g/cc 1.3 1.28 1.15 1.27 1.33

3 pH (1:5 Aq.Extraction) ---- 5.35 7.43 7.79 6.61 7.93

4 Conductivity (1:5 Aq.Extraction)

µS/cm 4370 538 2170 677 2120

5 Exchangeable Sodium meq/100g 44.4 5.0 12.0 21.3 9.8

6 Exchangeable Potassium meq/100g 5.5 3.1 1.8 3.1 1.5

7 Exchangeable Calcium meq/100g 7.1 6.0 15.0 5.1 7.3

8 Exchangeable Magnesium

meq/100g 28.8 16.7 19.3 38.6 40.7

9 Cation Exchange Capacity

meq/100g 85.8 30.8 48.0 68.1 59.3

10 Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR)

---- 14.92 2.10 4.11 6.47 2.85

11 Available Nitrogen as N Kg/hac 411.6 205.1 120.8 219.4 299.1

12 Available Phosphorous as P

Kg/hac 4.3 4.4 5.7 17.8 8.5

13 Available Potassium as K Kg/hac 4302.0 2434.4 1223.2 2384.3 1208.6

14 Organic Carbon % 0.63 0.96 1.90 1.03 1.35

15 Organic Matter % 1.08 1.65 3.27 1.78 2.32

16 Water Soluble Chlorides as Cl

mg/kg 9027.9 1134.4 5010.3 4064.9 3261.4

17 Water Soluble Sulphates as SO4

mg/kg 956 156 83 582 404

18 Aluminium % 6.9 6.5 6.2 6.2 5.6

19 Total Iron % 4.4 4.1 6 3.9 3.4

20 Manganese mg/kg 292.4 502.3 1142.8 1878.0 1878.0

21 Boron mg/kg 42.5 35.8 57.4 364.0 40.0

22 Zinc mg/kg 69.7 61.7 99.0 574.0 228.0

23 Total Chromium as Cr mg/kg 102.2 72.9 93.1 102.8 91.4

24 Lead as Pb mg/kg 12.6 20.1 18.2 15.4 17.5

25 Nickel as Ni mg/kg 63.0 52.0 53.1 51.0 52.6

26 Arsenic as As mg/kg <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

27 Mercury as Hg mg/kg <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

TABLE 22 : SOIL STANDARD CLASSIFICATION

Sl. No. Soil Test Classification

1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic 4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic 5.51-6.00 moderately acidic



58

Sl. No. Soil Test Classification

6.01-6.50 slightly acidic 6.51-7.30 Neutral 7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline 7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline 8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline 9.01 very strongly alkaline

2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity (µmhos/cm) (1ppm = 640 µmho/cm)

Up to 1.00 Average 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination 2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive to salts)

3 Organic Carbon (%) Up to 0.2: very less 0.21-0.4: less 0.41-0.5 medium, 0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient 0.81-1.00: sufficient >1.0 more than sufficient

4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Up to 50 very less 51-100 less 101-150 good 151-300 Better >300 sufficient

5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Up to 15 very less 16-30 less 31-50 medium, 51-65 on an average sufficient 66-80 sufficient >80 more than sufficient

6 Potash (Kg/ha) 0 -120 very less 120-180 less 181-240 medium 241-300 average 301-360 better >360 more than sufficient

Source: Hand Book of Agriculture, Indian Council of Agricultural Research Chemical Characteristics of the Soil The parameters considered for chemical analysis are: Soil reaction (pH), Electrical conductivity (EC), Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC)) Cations, like Calcium, Magnesium, Sodium and Potassium, sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR), Macro nutrients like Available Nitrogen, total Organic carbon, organic matter Available phosphorus, available potassium. Soil reaction (pH) The nutritional importance of pH is illustrated, thus hydrogen ion concentration has influence not only on, solubility of nutrients, but also upon facility with which these nutrients are absorbed by plants, even already in soil solution for e.g. Fe, Mn and Zn become less available as pH rises from 4.5 to 7 to 8. At pH 6.5 to7.0 utilization of nitrate and ammonia nitrogen becomes more available. In case of phosphorus it becomes less available to plant as pH increases above 8.5, due to its fixation in exchange complex of soil. For the five soil sample under consideration the pH ranges between 5.35 to 7.93 indicating soils are Neutral, slightly alkaline and slightly acidic.



59

Electrical conductivity (EC) The salt content of the soils are estimated by EC measurements, and is useful to designate soils as normal or sodic (saline). Electrical conductivity is expressed as µmhos/cm at 25◦C, µsmhos/ cm or mmhos /cm or sm/cm. The EC of five soil samples is between 538 to 4370 µmhos/cm and are below the limits to be called as average in Nagidipalem & Dirusummaru, harmful to germination in Project Site and Harmful to crops in Gollavanithippa and Nagendrapuram. This could be due to the conversion of lands into aqua cultural ponds and utilisation of feed supplements. Organic Carbon / Organic matter (%) Although accounting for only a small part of the total soil mass in mineral soils, organic matter influences physical, chemical, and biological activities in the soil. Organic matter in the soil is plant and animal residue which serves as a reserve for many essential nutrients, especially nitrogen. Determination of organic matter helps to estimate the nitrogen which will be released by bacterial activity for the next season depending on the conditions, soil aeration, pH, type of organic material, and other factors. The five soil samples under consideration contain 0.63 to 1.90 % organic carbon and 1.08 to 3.27 % organic matter, OM is calculated from organic carbon estimation. As per crop requirements the soils are having average sufficient to more than sufficient in Organic Carbon. Exchangeable Calcium (Ca++) Calcium, an essential part of plant cell wall structure, provides for normal transport and retention of other elements as well as strength in the plant. It is also thought to counteract the effect of alkali salts and organic acids within a plant and soil acidity. The exchangeable calcium content of five soil samples ranges between 5.1 to 15.0 me/100gm soil As per the physical data soils are clay having more bulk density, imperatively high water holding capacity, and slow permeability. As per physical characters soils are rated as average for agriculture. As per chemical characters soil reaction (pH) soils are Neutral, slightly acidic, slightly alkaline and electrical conductivity (EC) is saline. Organic matter is more than sufficient. Macro nutrient like nitrogen is good to sufficient and phosphorus is low to very low. Potassium is more than sufficient, calcium, magnesium is high and base saturation is high. Sodium is high and soils are of low quality for agriculture. Cation Exchange capacity is high indicating good fertility. Exchangeable Ca is high with high base saturation, Ex K is high Ex Na is high indicating alkalinity. Sodium adsorption ratio indicates the soils are normal. In buffer area (block of development Wells), the soils of most of the area are mostly under Inceptisols order followed by Entisols, Alfisols and Vertisols. The study area is mostly flat land with local undulations. The area is under very deep followed by moderately deep soils. The study area is affected by moderate water erosion followed by severe, erosion. The entire study area is mostly occupied fish ponds. As per analysis of soil data and secondary information the soils in study area not suitable for agricultural activity. Impact of the Project on the Soil Environment and its Mitigation Impact of any project on soil environment can be at different stages of project like construction phase and operational phase. Causes of impact can be air (Flue gas), Water (effluents) and solids (Waste and hazardous material).These impacts mostly confined within the project boundary.



60

3.5 Meteorological Conditions

The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is very useful for proper interpretation of the baseline information as well as for input prediction models for air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological parameters will also play an important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of the region. The year may broadly be divided into four seasons: Winter season : December to February Pre-monsoon season : March to May Monsoon season : June to September Post-monsoon season: October to November

3.5.1 Methodology

The methodology adopted for monitoring the surface meteorological conditions observations is as per the standard norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS : 8829) and India Meteorological Department (IMD). On-site monitoring was undertaken for various meteorological variables in order to generate the site-specific data. Data was collected every hour continuously from 29

th January 2018 to 10

th April 2018.

Methodology of Data Generation A Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring equipment was installed on top of a building at a height of 6 m above ground level to record wind speed, direction, relative humidity and temperature. The meteorological monitoring station was

located in such a way that it is free from any obstructions and as per the guidelines specified under IS: 8829. Cloud cover was recorded by visual observation. Rainfall was monitored by using rain gauge.

The continuous recording meteorological instrument of Dynalab, Pune (Model No.WDL 1002) has been used for recording the met data. The sensitivity of the equipment is as given in Table-23.

TABLE 23:SENSITIVITY OF METEOROLOGY MONITORING EQUIPMENT

Sr. No. Sensor Sensitivity

1 Wind speed Sensor ± 0.02 m/s

2 Wind direction Sensor ± 3 degrees

3 Temperature Sensor ± 0.2oC

Sources of Information Secondary information on meteorological conditions has been collected from the nearest IMD station at Narsapur. The available meteorological data of IMD, Narsapur station has been collected for the past 10 years and analysed.

3.5.2 Presentation of Data

The meteorological data is collected from IMD - Narsapur, which is the nearest IMD station to the project site. The data collected from IMD includes wind speed, wind direction (recorded in sixteen directions), temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure; rainfall and cloud cover over a period of past 10 years. The monthly maximum, minimum and average values are collected for all the parameters except wind speed and direction.



61

All these parameters are recorded twice a day viz at 0830 and 1730 hours. The collected data is tabulated in Table-24.

TABLE 24 METEOROLOGICAL DATA FROM IMD (1971-2000)

Month

Temperature(0C) Humidity % Rainfall Mean Wind

speed (Kmph)

Predominant direction

Min Max Highest

Lowest

8.30 17.30 Monthly (mm)

Rainy days

1st 2nd

Jan 19.7 28.7 30.5 17.4 88 69 15.0 0.8 1.7 NE E

Feb 11.7 30.2 34.8 16.2 69 37 24.1 1.9 2.0 SE NE

Mar 23.3 32.7 34.7 20.6 84 69 8.9 0.5 2.3 SW S

Apr 25.6 34.3 36.4 22.6 76 69 36.2 1.8 3.1 SW S

May 27.5 36.3 42.0 23.3 73 66 67.3 2.3 4.0 SW S

June 27.1 35.2 40.1 23.1 73 67 105.2 5.9 4.9 SW S

July 25.7 32.3 36.6 23.0 81 73 232.9 11.6 4.3 W SW

Aug 25.5 31.6 34.5 23.2 83 76 227.3 11.3 4.3 W SW

Sep 25.7 31.6 34.2 23.3 86 79 213.1 10.3 2.4 W SW

Oct 24.5 30.8 33.0 21.9 86 80 230.0 10.9 1.8 NE E

Nov 22.1 29.9 31.6 18.5 83 73 105.8 4.2 2.6 NE E

Dec 19.8 28.5 30.0 17.0 81 68 19.4 1.2 2.3 NE E

Meteorological Data Generated at site The study of meteorological conditions forms an intrinsic part of the environment impact assessment study. The meteorological conditions of an area and the EPS process are both intertwined and each has a definite influence over the other. Favourable weather conditions and the surroundings help the successful operation of the ONGC activities, while the EPS Operation influences the weather in both positive as well as negative ways. Wind speed and direction data recorded during the study period is useful in identifying the influence of meteorology on the air quality of the area. The meteorological data recorded at the site for the study period is given in Table 25.

TABLE 25 OBSERVED METEOROLOGICAL DATA ONSITE

Period Temp (

oC) Humidity (%) Rain fall

wind direction Min Max Min Max (mm)

January 2018 14 33 28 89 0.0 NE

February 2018 16 36 5 96 0.0 SE

March 2018 19 37 14 95 0.0 SW

April 2018 22 40 24 89 0.25 SW

3.5.3 Wind Pattern

The detailed analysis of the wind pattern of the study area and wind pattern is drawn using software WRPLOT. The predominant wind direction from 29


nd April

2018 are shown in the Figure 18.



62

FIGURE 18 : WIND ROSE FOR STUDY PERIOD

3.6 Ambient Air Quality

The study is essential to establish environmentally significant issues due to EPS Establishment being taken-up and critical environmental changes that have occurred since the initiation of such activities. For the ONGC BTSAD Site near Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh, The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically designed ambient air quality network. The design of monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the following considerations.

Meteorological conditions on a synoptic scale Topography of the study area Representation of the regional background levels Representation of the plant site Influence of the existing sources Major settlements in the study area

Ambient air quality stations were set up at 6 different locations with consideration at above mentioned points. The locations were selected in downwind, cross wind and up wind of the proposed project. The common air pollutants namely Particulate matter (PM10 & PM2.5), Sulphur dioxide (SO2), the nitrogen di oxide (NO2), Hydrocarbons, VOCs were sampled on 24 hourly and results were averaged to 24 hours to meet the requirements of the MoEF&CC and compared with the standards stipulated by CPCB. The mono-aromatic hydrocarbons like Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl-benzene and Xylene (BTEX) are considered as volatile organic compounds (VOCs). VOCs in ambient air originate from various biogenic and anthropogenic sources. Among the VOCs, benzene is regarded as carcinogen to humans. Among the selected VOCs pollutants, they follow a sequence as Xylene > Ethyl-benzene > benzene > toluene respectively. Their occurrence indicates the contribution of combustion of organic matter such as wood, petroleum product, motor vehicle emissions etc.



63

The ambient air quality locations are given in Table 26 and their locations on map is shown in Figure 19 and Photos are provided as Figure 20. The ambient air quality results obtained are given in Table 27.

TABLE 26 : AIR MONITORING LOCATIONS

Code Sampling Location Latitude Longitude Direction

AQ1 Project site 16.4228 81.4994 --

AQ2 Nagendrapuram 16.4233 81.4961 Down wind

AQ3 Gutlapoda 16.4384 81.4787 Cross wind

AQ4 Losari 16.3989 81.4723 Down wind

AQ5 Dayyaladibba 16.4360 81.5176 Up-wind

AQ6 Gollavanitippa 16.4624 81.5078 Up-wind

FIGURE 19 : AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING PHOTOS



64

FIGURE 20 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LOCATIONS



65

TABLE 27 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS (for 3 months starting from January 2018)

Code Location PM10 µg/m

3 PM2.5 µg/m

3

Min Max Avg 98th

%ile Min Max Avg 98th

%ile

AQ1 Project site 47.6 55.6 51.5 55.1 22.0 27.1 24.6 26.9

AQ2 Nagendrapuram 45.0 50.2 47.0 49.9 20.3 25.6 22.3 25.2

AQ3 Gutlapoda 40.0 42.3 41.2 42.3 19.3 21.6 20.5 21.6

AQ4 Losari 41.0 43.3 42.2 43.3 20.6 22.9 21.8 22.9

AQ5 Dayyaladibba 42.2 44.5 43.3 44.5 21.1 23.4 22.3 23.4

AQ6 Gollavanitippa 44.1 46.5 45.3 46.5 22.3 24.6 23.5 24.6

NAAQ Stds 100 µg/m3 60 µg/m

3

Code Location SO2 µg/m

3 NO2 µg/m

3

Min Max Avg 98th


%ile

AQ1 Project site 7.4 10.9 9.2 10.8 8.5 12.3 10.2 12.0


AQ3 Gutlapoda 10.1 12.4 11.3 12.4 11.5 13.8 12.7 13.8

AQ4 Losari 7.8 10.1 9.0 10.1 8.9 11.2 10.1 11.2

AQ5 Dayyaladibba 8.1 10.4 9.3 10.4 9.8 12.1 11.0 12.1

AQ6 Gollavanitippa 9.3 11.6 10.5 11.6 10.8 15.1 12.9 15.1

NAAQ Stds 80 µg/m3 80 µg/m

3

Code Location Ozone µg/m

3 Ammonia µg/m

3

Min Max Avg 98th


%ile

AQ1 Project site 5.6 9.4 353 9.3 7.5 9.4 8.5 9.4

AQ2 Nagendrapuram 2.4 8.2 341 8.1 7.5 9.6 8.5 9.6

AQ3 Gutlapoda 4.0 5.6 331 5.6 4.1 7.2 6.4 7.2

AQ4 Losari 3.5 6.5 352 6.3 4.1 5.4 4.7 5.3

AQ5 Dayyaladibba 3.9 6.3 321 6.2 4.5 6.8 5.6 6.7

AQ6 Gollavanitippa 3.5 7.1 295 7.1 6.5 8.6 7.7 8.6

NAAQ Standards 100 µg/m3 400 µg/m

3

Code Location Hydrocarbon, µg/m

3 CO, µg/m

3

Min Max Avg 98

th

%ile Min Max Avg

98th

%ile

AQ1 Project site 198.2 219 208.3 217.7 300 353 324 353

AQ2 Nagendrapuram 190.1 209.3 202.9 208.3 245 341 291 332

AQ3 Gutlapoda 172.2 205.4 185.4 201.6 301 331 313 327

AQ4 Losari 183.6 214.5 200.5 213.8 305 352 318 342

AQ5 Dayyaladibba 168.3 191.9 177.2 191.6 248 321 305 320

AQ6 Gollavanitippa 159.6 192.3 173.2 190.9 239 295 267 295

NAAQ Standards - 200 µg/m3

Code Location Methane , µg/m

3 Non Methane , µg/m

3

Min Max Avg 98th


%ile

AQ1 Project site 125 142 135 141 68.4 78 72 77.7


AQ3 Gutlapoda 115.4 141.2 125.0 137.9 45.8 66.1 60.4 65.7

AQ4 Losari 120.1 139.4 131.9 139.3 59.5 75.1 68.6 74.9

AQ5 Dayyaladibba 116 127 122.3 126.6 47.8 68.4 54.9 67.7

AQ6 Gollavanitippa 108 122 115.4 121.1 49.5 75.4 57.7 73.2



66

Code Location Benzene,

µg/m3

Benzo-alfa- Pyrene,

Maximum ng/m

3

Lead as Pb, µg/m

3

Nickel as Ni, ng/m

3

Arsenic as As, ng/m

3

AQ1 Project site <0.01 0.13 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1

AQ2 Nagendrapuram <0.01 0.28 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1

AQ3 Gutlapoda <0.01 0.23 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1

AQ4 Losari <0.01 0.19 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1

AQ5 Dayyaladibba <0.01 0.27 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1

AQ6 Gollavanitippa <0.01 0.67 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1

NAAQ Standards 5 µg/m3 5 ng/m

3 1 µg/m

3 20 ng/m

3 6 ng/m

3

All the AAQ values are observed to be well within the permissible limits as there is no development near the EPS Locations. Project site is showing the highest PM10 Value of 55.6. PM 2.5 of Project site is the highest with 27.1 µg/m

3. SO2 is highest in Gutlapoda 12.4

µg/m3 & NO2 is highest in Gollavanitippa 15.1 µg/m

3. Ozone levels are more in Project site

(9.4 µg/m3). Ambient Air Quality Data for the monitoring period is provided as Annexure II.

3.7 Water Quality Assessment

Groundwater and surface water collected from the study area to assess the water quality during the study period. Surface Water locations are given in Table 28, and groundwater locations are given in Table 29. The analysis results of surface and ground water is given in Table 30 and Table 31. The sampling location map is given in Figure 21 and Photos are provided in Figure 22.

TABLE 28 SURFACE WATER LOCATIONS

Code Sampling Location Latitude Longitude

SW1 Nagidipalem (River Canal Water) 16.4047 81.4914

SW2 Yanamadurru 16.4908 81.5222

SW3 Ramayanapuram 16.4639 81.5097

SW4 Pathapadu 16.3839 81.4861

TABLE 29 GROUNDWATER LOCATIONS

Code Sampling Location Latitude Longitude

GW1 Nagendrapuram 16.4231 81.4983

GW2 Nagidipalem 16.4064 81.4922

GW3 Kalipatnam 16.3875 81.5442

GW4 Pathapadu 16.3853 81.4944

GW5 Gollavanipeta 16.4647 81.5042

GW6 Yanamadurru 16.4897 81.5289

GW7 Ramayanapurram 16.4583 81.5081



67

FIGURE 21 WATER SAMPLING PHOTOS

Surface Water

Ground Water



68

FIGURE 22 WATER SAMPLING LOCATION MAP



69

TABLE 30 : SURFACE WATER QUALITY S. No Parameters UOM SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

1 pH - 6.8 7.21 7.12 6.9

2 Colour Hazen 6 4 4 8

3 Conductivity µS/cm 8540 1400 1600 25800

4 TDS mg/l 4961 825 953 15179

5 DO mg/l 5.8 6.1 5.9 5.7

6 BOD mg/l 3.5 <3 <3 7.6

7 COD mg/l 12 <5 <5 25

8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 1481.9 346.9 415.5 5298.6

9 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 250.8 108.6 125.8 1050

10 Calcium as Ca mg/l 280.0 78.5 95.6 1083.4

11 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 190 36.6 42.9 629.4

12 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 2566.0 346.5 395.6 6863.0

13 Residual free chlorine mg/l <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

14 Phosphates as PO4 mg/l 2.5 1.2 0.9 4.2

15 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 368.3 85.4 104.5 1963.5

16 Fluorides as F mg/l 1.0 0.8 0.9 1.2

17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 2.2 1.8 2.3 5.6

18 Sodium as Na mg/l 1243 154.3 165.5 3326.5

19 Potassium as K mg/l 60 12.4 19.4 256.4

20 Total Boron as B mg/l 1.2 0.5 0.9 2.5

21 Phenolic Compounds mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

22 Cyanides mg/l <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.002

23 Oil & grease mg/l <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0

24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003

25 Arsenic as As mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

26 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.15 0.08 0.05 0.35

27 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.12 0.02 0.06 0.24

28 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.65 0.18 0.32 1.02

29 Chromium as Cr+6

mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

30 Selenium as Se mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

31 Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.32 0.05 0.08 0.86

32 Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.08 <0.01 <0.01 0.36

33 Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

34 SAR - 14.1 3.6 3.5 19.9

35 Insecticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent

36 Anionic detergents as MBAS mg/l <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

37 Total Coliforms MPN/100 925 425 682 1586

38 E.Coli Absent 5 8 2 10

3.7.1 Surface Water Quality

The analysis of results indicate that pH is found to be in the range of 6.8-7.2, which is well within

the specified standard 6.5-8.5. The TDS was observed to be in the range of 825.0-953.0 mg/l. DO

was observed to be in the range of 5.7-6.1 mg/l. The chlorides and sulphates were found to be in

the range of 346.5-395.6 mg/l and 85.4-104.5 mg/l respectively and are well within the permissible

limits, expect nagidipalem and pathapadu villages. It is evident from the above values that all the

parameters are well within the permissible limits. Bacteriological studies reveal the absence of E.

coli forms (Nagidipalem village analysis parameters like TDS, chloride and sulphates were found

to be 4961 mg/l, 2566 mg/l, 368.3 mg/l respectively and Pathapadu village analysis parameters

like TDS, chloride and sulphates were found to be 15179 mg/l, 6863 mg/l, 1963.5 mg/l

respectively because of the influence of backwaters).



70

TABLE 31 : GROUND WATER QUALITY

S.No Parameters Unit of

Measurements IS: 10500

Limits GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7

1 pH - 6.5 – 8.5(NR) 7.6 7.7 7.6 6.6 7.5 7 7.21

2 Colour Hazen 5(15) 4 5 5 8 6 7 6

3 Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

4 Odour - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

5 Conductivity µS/cm $ 426 404 1863 2845 956 1578 815

6 Turbidity NTU 1(5) 1 1 2 4 2 3 2

7 TDS mg/l 500(2000) 268 256 1152 1734 605 977 515

8 Total Hardness as CaCO3

mg/l 200(600)

110.2 104.8 512.5 807.0 246.3 456.3 229.6

9 Total Alkalinity mg/l 200(600) 92.8 105.3 386.9 425 192.2 325.8 185.4

10 Calcium as Ca mg/l 75(200) 27.3 25.8 102.3 185.5 64.6 95.6 52.5

11 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 30(100) 10.2 9.8 62.4 83.4 20.6 52.8 23.9

12 Residual Chlorine mg/l 0.2(1.0) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

13 Boron as B mg/l 0.5(1.0) 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.06 0.02

14 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 250(1000) 73.5 54 296.5 588.9 152.6 235.4 114.6

15 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 200(400) 10.8 13.3 92.4 132.1 56.6 98.2 47.8

16 Fluorides as F mg/l 1.0(1.5) 0.6 0.3 1.1 1.2 0.8 1.2 0.6

17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 45(NR) 3.2 2.4 14.2 22.3 8.2 12.1 6.2

18 Sodium as Na mg/l $ 45 42 185.5 262.7 102.3 146.9 78.4

19 Potassium as K mg/l $ 4.2 3.2 10.2 32.4 6.8 8.8 5.2

20 Phenolic Compounds

mg/l 0.001(0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

21 Cyanides as CN mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.002

22 Anionic Detergents mg/l 0.2 (1.0) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

23 Mineral Oil mg/l 0.5(NR) <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.003 (NR) <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003

25 Arsenic as As mg/l 0.01(0.05) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

26 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05 (1.5) <0.01 <0.01 0.002 0.05 0.01 0.02 <0.01

27 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.01 (NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

28 Manganese as Mn mg/l 0.1 (0.3) <0.01 <0.01 0.02 0.08 <0.01 0.01 <0.01

29 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3(NR) 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.15 0.03 0.09 0.02

30 Total Chromium as mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.01 <0.01 0.03 0.08 <0.01 0.02 <0.01



71

3.7.2 Ground Water Quality

The analysis results indicate that the pH ranges in between 6.6 to 7.7, which is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. Total

hardness was observed to be ranging from 104.8 to 512.5 mg/l except pathapadu village, it is found that 807 mg/l. The hardness was

found to be well within the limit of 600 mg/l at all locations. Chlorides at all the locations were within the permissible limit, ranging in

between 54.0 to 588.9 mg/l. Fluorides were observed to be ranging in between 0.3 to 1.2 mg/l and are found to be within the

permissible limit. Nitrates are found to be in range of 2.4 – 22.3 mg/l. Bacteriological studies reveal that no coliform bacteria are

present in the samples. The heavy metal contents were observed to be in well within the limits.

Cr

31 Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

32 Zinc as Zn mg/l 5(15) 0.02 0.05 0.09 0.23 0.06 0.13 0.05

33 Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.03(0.2) <0.01 <0.01 0.04 0.06 <0.01 0.02 <0.01

34 Mercury as Hg mg/l 0.001(NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

35 Pesticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

36 Ammonia as Total Ammonia-N

mg/l 0.5(NR)

2.2 1.5 3.2 5.6 2.3 4.5 1.8

37 Silver as Ag mg/l 0.1(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

38 Molybdenum as Mo mg/l 0.07(NR) 0.01 0.03 0.13 0.23 0.09 0.18 0.06

39 Barium as Ba mg/l 0.7(NR) 0.02 0.01 0.05 0.15 0.03 0.12 0.09

40 Sulphide as H2S mg/l 0.05(NR) 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.3 0.2

41 Total Coliforms MPN/100 ml 10 Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil

42 E.Coli MPN/100 ml Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent



72

3.8 Noise Environment

The environmental impact of noise from any development activity can be assessed by taking into consideration various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and annoyance and general community responses. The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline noise levels and assess the impact of the noise levels expected to be generated by the commissioning and operation of the EPS around it.

3.8.1 Sources of noise

The main sources of noise in the study area are domestic activities, commercial activities, industrial activities and vehicular traffic.

3.8.2 Noise monitoring locations

Baseline noise levels have been monitored at three (3) locations within the study area, using a sound level meter. The noise level monitoring has been conducted for assessment of existing noise level status, keeping in view the land use pattern and anthropogenic activities. The day levels of noise have been monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and the night levels during 10 pm to 6 am. The noise monitoring locations is given in Table 32, the noise monitoring map is shown in Figure 23 and Photos of the same are provided in Figure 24.

TABLE 32: NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Code Sampling Location *Noise Zone Latitude Longitude

N1 Nagendrapuram D 16.4261 81.4967

N2 Nagidipalem D 16.4044 81.4928

N3 Project Site A 16.4219 81.4994

Note: * Area Code as per the Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000: A- Industrial Area, B- Commercial Area, C- Residential Area, D- Silence Zone

FIGURE 23 : NOISE MONITORING PHOTOS



73

FIGURE 24 NOISE MONITORING LOCATION



74

3.8.3 Results and discussions The noise monitoring results are tabulated in Table 33

TABLE 33 SUMMARY OF MONITORED AMBIENT NOISE QUALITY

Location Code N1 N2 N3

*Zone D D A

L10 38.4 42.0 45.2

L50 36.5 41.2 44.0

L90 35.3 39.7 42.2

Leq 36.6 41.3 48.3

Lmin 30.7 32.1 33.6

Lmax 46.7 49.9 56.5

Lday 39.7 45.3 50.0

Lnight 32.7 35.8 37.8

CPCB Standards

Lday 50 50 75

Lnight 40 40 70

Note: * Area Code as per the Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000: A- Industrial Area, B- Commercial Area, C- Residential Area, D- Silence Zone Source: EIA Studies

The day and night equivalent noise levels observed in the monitored industrial area, i.e., ONGC Site during the study period are 50.0 dB(A) and 37.8 dB(A) respectively, indicating ambient noise levels within the standards suggested by CPCB. The day and night equivalent noise levels observed in the residential areas during the study period are ranging between 39.7 to 45.3 dB (A) and 32.7 to 35.8 dB (A), which are within the standards suggested by CPCB. Noise generating activities are limited due to only farming and general anthropogenic activities in the villages.

3.9 Bio Diversity – Flora and Fauna

Ecological studies are one of the important aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment with a view to conserve environmental quality and biodiversity. Ecological systems show complex inter-relationships between biotic and abiotic components including dependence, competition and mutualism. Biotic components comprise of both plant and animal communities, which interact not only within and between themselves but also with the abiotic components a viz. physical and chemical components of the environment. Generally, biological communities are good indicators of climatic and edaphic factors. Studies on biological aspects of ecosystems are important in Environmental Impact Assessment for safety of natural flora and fauna. The biological environment includes terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems. The animal and plant communities co-exist in a well-organized manner. Their natural settings can get disturbed by any externally induced anthropological activities or by naturally occurring calamities or disaster. So, once this setting is disturbed, it sometimes is either practically impossible or may take a longer time to come back to its original state. Hence, changes in the status of flora and fauna are an elementary requirement of Environmental Impact Assessment studies, in view of the need for conservation of environmental quality and biodiversity. Information on flora and fauna was collected within



75

the study area. Relevant details on aquatic life within the study area were collected from related government offices. The present report gives the review of published secondary data and the results of field sampling conducted during winter season 2018.

3.9.1 Objectives of Ecological Studies The present study was undertaken with the following objectives:

To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the block area;

To assess the distribution of animal life spectra;

To study inventory of flora and fauna in proposed block area

To prepare status report of flora and fauna in proposed block area

To understand the productivity of the water bodies; and

To ascertain migratory routes of fauna and possibility of breeding grounds.

3.9.2 Methodology adopted for the Survey To achieve the above objectives, a detailed study of the entire project area was undertaken. The different methods adopted were as follows: o Compilation of secondary data with respect to the study area from published literature

and Government agencies; o Generation of primary data by undertaking systematic ecological studies in the area; o Discussion with local people so as to elicit information about local plants, animals and

their uses; and o Gathering data for ethno-biology.

3.9.3 Study Period

The study period is January-March 2018.

3.9.4 Scope, Aim & Objectives

Evaluation of the biodiversity scenario of the project area. To understand ecological setting of the project area in terms of National Parks / Wildlife

Sanctuary / Forests / Tiger reserve / Eco-sensitive attributes / Wetlands / Creeks / Mangroves / Breeding and Nesting sites / Biosphere Reserve/ Tiger Reserves and Elephant corridor etc. within project study area.

To report Schedule, threatened, rare, endangered and endemic species within the project area.

To evaluate the likely impact of the proposed project activities and its aspects on surrounding habitats / floral and faunal components of the project study area.

To suggest / prepare action plan to mitigate likely impacts on the biodiversity of the project area through green belt development (by following CPCB guidelines).

3.9.5 Field Data Collection / Inventory

Biodiversity of flora-fauna reported from the project region have been used to generate the biological database of the study area. Details of reference are given in the references section of the report.



76

3.9.6 Forest block with in block area There is no Reserve Forest within the Study Area of the EPS Project.

3.9.7 Terrestrial Ecological Status: Primary Survey A preliminary survey was made in the study block area. The primary data was generated through: 1. Preparing a general checklist of all plants encountered in the study area. This would

indicate the biodiversity for wild and cultivated plants.. 2. Determining the bird population of migratory and local birds by taking 10 random

readings at every location; 3. Observing mammals, amphibians and reptiles, noting their calls, droppings, burrows,

pugmarks and other signs; and 4. Local inhabitants were interviewed for uses of plants and animals and to get ethno

biological data. The sampling locations for ecological study of the project are given in Table-34 and Figure-25. TABLE 34 DETAILS OF TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Station Code Name of the Station Coordinates

TE-1 Perupalem 16º 24’ 06.11”N, 81º 34’ 46.59” E

TE-2 Mutyalapalli 16º 24’ 06.26”N, 81º 34’ 04.59” E

TE-3 Kottata 16º 23’ 54.67”N, 81º 32’ 51.70” E

TE-4 Kalipatnam 16º 23’ 36.67”N, 81º 32’ 03.29” E

TE-5 Pathapadu 16º 23’ 04.88”N, 81º 29’ 35.69” E

TE-6 Nagidipalem 16º 24’ 14.85”N, 81º 29’ 39.44” E

TE-7 Lakshmipuram 16º 23’ 42.55”N, 81º 26’ 49.58” E

TE-8 Darithippa 16º 24’ 20.76”N, 81º 30’ 30.03” E

TE-9 Matsyagada 16º 25’ 12.95”N, 81º 31’ 03.82” E

TE-10 Jagannathapuram 16º 25’ 07.61”N, 81º 30’ 39.93” E

TE-11 Deyyalathippa 16º 26’ 10.51”N, 81º 31’ 06.11” E

TE-12 Ramayanapuram / Gollavanitippa

16º 27’ 49.20”N, 81º 30’ 42.50” E

FIGURE 25 : SURVEY PHOTOGRAPHS



77



78

3.9.8 Status of Terrestrial Bio diversity

A proposed project site is situated in the in Bhimavaram tehsil of the West Godavari district. Agriculture crops mainly includes paddy, Coconut, Banana and mango and vegetable crops. Coconut plantations are dominant in the region. Sandy coastal areas are possesses with Casuarina plantations. Similarly, aquaculture (pisiculture and prawn farms) are predominant in the Bhimavaram region of West Godavari district. Most of the agricultural lands are converted into aquaculture ponds. Flora Proposed project site is existing drill site which is in possession of M/S ONGC Ltd. Some common floral species recorded from site includes Calotropis gigantea, Ipomoea aquatica, Cynodon dactylon and Alternenthera species. The entire area was surrounded by Aquaculture Farms. FIGURE 26 : FLORA IN STUDY AREA

Calotropis gigantea Ipomoea aquatica

Cynodon dactylon Alternenthera sp.



79

Methodology for the study for Flora Species The methodology adopted to collect information on flora and fauna from core and buffer areas are as given below: Floral Diversity The aim of the present study was to enumeration of the available plant resources including endangered species and obtaining a broad representation of the existing floristic variations in the core (proposed project area) and buffer area (10 km radius from the proposed project). By crisscross walking in the core and buffer areas for the primary survey, all the species encountered were identified and recorded. Identification of plants was done using different books on flora like [Gamble (1915-36), Saxena & Brahmam (1994-96), Pullaiah & Chennaiah (1997), Pullaiah & Ali Moulali (1997), Pullaiah (1997) and Chetty et. al., (2007)]. Unidentified specimens were taken to the Herbarium of the Botanical Survey of India, Deccan Circle, Hyderabad and identified with the help of available experts. Phyto-sociology Phytosociological study was carried out following Random Quadrate Sampling method. In order to accommodate maximum representation of different types of plant species, sample plots were laid in selected places in different parts of study area of project that contain natural vegetation. Quadrates of 10 m X 10 m (100 squre meters) size were randomly laid to study tree species. Within these sample plots, sub-plots of 5 m x 5 m were laid down randomly for studying the shrub layer and regeneration of tree species. For information on ground layer including herbaceous species, quadrats of 1 m x 1 m size were laid down randomly. Quantitative analysis The primary data recorded by laying quadrats were utilized to derive density, frequency and abundance following standard phyto-sociological methods of Mishra (1968). Important Value Index for trees only was estimated following the formula developed by Cottam and Curtis (1956) taking into consideration of relative frequency, relative density and Relative Dominance. Species diversity indices like Shannon-Wiener Index (H') and Simpson’s Index

() were calculated as per Magurran (1988). Formulae used for various calculations are as given below: Density: It is an expression of the numerical strength of a species where the total number of individuals of each species in all the quadrats is divided by the total number of quadrats studied. Density is calculated by the equation:

Density (D) =Total number of individuals in all quadrats

Total number of quadrats studied

Frequency: This term refers to the degree of dispersion of individual species in an area and usually expressed in terms of percentage occurrence. It was studied by sampling the study area at several places randomly and recorded the name of the species that occurred in each sampling units. It is calculated by the equation:

Frequency (F) =Total number of quadrats of occurrence of a species

Total number of quadrats studied X 100

Abundance: It is the study of the number of individuals of different species in the community per unit area. By quadrates method, samplings are made at random at several places and the number of individuals of each species was summed up for all the quadrates



80

divided by the total number of quadrates in which the species occurred. It is represented by the equation:

Abundance (A) =Total number of individuals in all quadrats

Total number quadrats of occurrence

Important Value Index: This index is used to determine the overall importance of each species in the community structure. In calculating this index, the percentage values of the relative frequency, relative density and relative dominance are summed up together and this value is designated as the Importance Value Index. IVI is calculated only for tree category. Relative Density: Relative density is the study of numerical strength of a species in relation to the total number of individuals of all the species and can be calculated as:

Relative Density (RD) =Number of individuals of a species

Total number of individuals of all species X 100

Relative Frequency: The degree of dispersion of individual species in an area in relation to the number of all the species occurred.

Relative Frequency (RF) =Number of occurrences of a species

Total number of occurences of all species X 100

Relative Dominance: Dominance of a species is determined by the value of the basal cover. Relative dominance is the coverage value of a species with respect to the sum of coverage of the rest of the species in the area.

Relative Dominance (RDo) =Basal area of individual speceis

Basal area of all speceis X 100

The total basal area was calculated from the sum of the total diameter of all trees. The basal area was measured at breast height (1.5 m) and by using the formula πr2. Shannon’s diversity index and Simpson’s index of dominance by using the following equation.

Shannon-Wiener Diversity Index (H') = - pi ln pi

Simpson’s Dominance index () = pi2 Where, pi is the proportion of individuals of the ith species; pi = Ni / N Ni is the number of individuals in the ith species and N is the total number of individuals of all species in the stand Biodiversity database of the region reveals the presence of 74 plant species from various habitats of the region, which includes 34 species of trees, 9 climbers, 22 herbs, 1 grass and 8 shrub species. Taxonomic account for all species is given bellow TABLE 35 EXISTING FLORAL SPECIES IN THE PROPOSED PROJECT SITE

S. No. Habit Scientific Name Common Name Family

1 Tree Ailanthus excelsa Aralu, Peda manu Simaroubaceae

2 Tree Anacardium occidentale Munthamamidi Anacardiaceae

3 Tree Acacia spp - Mimosaceae



81


4 Tree Annona reticulata Ramphal Annonaceae

5 Tree Anogeissus latifolia shirimanu, sirimanu, yelama Combretaceae

6 Tree Azadirachta indica Vepa Meliaceae

7 Tree Bombax ceiba Salmali, Erra buruga Bombacaceae

8 Tree Borassus flabellifer Palmyra palm Arecaceae

9 Tree Butea superba Palasha, Teega moduga Fabaceae

10 Tree Carica papaya Boppayi Pand Caricaceae

11 Tree Casuarina equisetifolia Saruguda Casuarinaceae

12 Tree Cleistanthus collinus kadise, korshe, korsi, vadise Euphorbiaceae

13 Tree Cocos nucifera kobbari chettu, Coconut Arecaceae

14 Tree Dalbergia paniculata -- Fabaceae

15 Tree Delonix regia Gulmohar Caesalpiniaceae

16 Tree Emblica officinalis Usiri, Usirikaya Phyllanthaceae

17 Tree Eucalyptus tereticornis Neelagiri Myrtaceae

18 Tree Ficus hispida Kakodumbara, bomma-medi Moraceae

19 Tree Helicteres isora Avartani, Chemali nara Sterculiaceae

20 Tree Lannea coromandelica Ajasrngi Anacardiaceae

21 Tree Madhuca longifolia Madhuuka, Ippa Sapotaceae

22 Tree Mangifera indica -- Anacardiaceae

23 Tree Mimusops elengi Spanish cherry, Maulsari Sapotaceae

24 Tree Moringa oleifera Mochakamu, Mulaga Moringaceae

25 Tree Musa paradisiaca Banana Musacea

26 Tree Murraya koenigii Karivepa, karepaku Rutaceae

27 Tree Oroxylum indicum Pampini , Shyonaka Bignoniaceae

28 Tree Phyllanthus emblica Usiri Euphorbiaceae

29 Tree Psidium guajava Guava, Amrood Myrtaceae

30 Tree Punica granatum Pomegranate, Anar Lythraceae

31 Tree Terminalia tomentosa Asan, Indian Laurel Combreteaceae

32 Tree Wrightia tomentosa adaviankudu Apocynaceae

33 Tree Xylia xylocarpa kondatangedu, konda tangedu Fabaceae

34 Tree Ziziphus mauritiana Regu Rhamnaceae

35 Climber Asparagus species Pilli tegalu Asparagaceae

36 Climber Caesalpinia bonduc Kuberaksha, Gachchakaya Caesalpiniaceae

37 Climber Cardiospermum halicacabum buddakakara, ekkudutige Sapindaceae

38 Climber Cissampelos pareira Velvet Leaf, Menispermaceae

39 Climber Coccinia grandis Donda kaya Cucurbitaceae

40 Climber Convolvulus species -- Convolvulaceae

41 Climber Mucuna pruriens Kapikacchu, Pilliadugu Fabaceae

42 Climber Piper nigrum Miryalatige Piperaceae

43 Climber Tribulus Cinnpalleru Zygophylaceae

44 Grass Cynodon species Ghericha, gerichagaddi Poaceae

45 Herb Achyranthes aspera Uttareni Amaranthaceae



82


46 Herb Adhatoda Vasica addasaramu Acanthaceae

47 Herb Alternanthera sessilis Ponnaganti kura Amaranthaceae

48 Herb Amaranthus viridis chilaka-thotakoora Amaranthaceae

49 Herb Boerhavia diffusa Punarnava Nyctaginaceae

50 Herb Cleome gynandra Vaminta, Thella vamita Capparidaceae

51 Herb Commelina benghalensis neerukaassuvu, nirukassuvu Commelinaceae

52 Herb Eichhornia crassipes Budaga tamara, Gurra pudekka moka

Pontederiaceae

53 Herb Evolvulus nummularius Roundleaf Bindweed Convolvulaceae

54 Herb Gomphrena celosioides Coastal Globe Amaranth Amaranthaceae

55 Herb Heliotropium species -- Boraginaceae

56 Herb Manselia minuta -- Marsileaceae

57 Herb Marsilea quadrifolia -- Marsileaceae

58 Herb Nelumbo nucifera Lotus, Tamara, Erra-tamara Nelumbonaceae

59 Herb Pistia stratiotes Akasatamara, Antara tamara Araceae

60 Herb Psoralea corylifolia Bakuchi Fabaceae

61 Herb Salvinia molesta -- Salviniaceae

62 Herb Sida cordata benda, gayapaku, tirunala Malvaceae

63 Herb Trapa natans Kubyakam, Pandi gadda Lythraceae

64 Herb Tridax procumbens Gaddi chamanti Asteraceae

65 Herb Typha elephantina -- Typhaceae

66 Herb Zingiber officinale Ginger, Allamu chettu Zingiberaceae

67 Shrub Abutilon indicum Thuthurabenda Malvaceae

68 Shrub Calotropis species Jilledu Asclepiadaceae

69 Shrub Cissus quadrangularis Nalleru Vitaceae

70 Shrub Costus speciosus Kebuka, kasmiramu Costaceae

71 Shrub Dodonaea viscosa Bandaru, Pullena Sapindaceae

72 Shrub Grewia hirsuta chimachipuru, jibilike, chitti jana, jibilika

Tiliaceae

73 Shrub Lantana camara Pulikampa Verbenaceae

74 Shrub Tamarix species -- Tamaricaceae

Simpson’s diversity index of the plants in the study area is based on the total number of all species. The Simpson’s Diversity Index for herbs, shrubs and trees is shown in Table-36. Diversity of trees is comparatively good with respect to herbs and shrubs cover.

TABLE 36 PHYTOSOCIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF TREES IN STUDY AREA

Tree F D/ha A/ha IVI pi ln pi pi2

Ailanthus excelsa 33.33 77.78 233.3 27.07 -0.258 0.0151

Anacardium occidentale 27.78 88.89 320.0 31.4 -0.276 0.0197

Acacia spp 33.33 88.89 266.7 36.96 -0.276 0.0197

Annona reticulata 16.67 72.22 433.3 17 -0.248 0.013

Anogeissus latifolia 33.33 88.89 266.7 24.41 -0.276 0.0197

Azadirachta indica 66.67 150 225.0 49.9 -0.341 0.0561



83

Tree F D/ha A/ha IVI pi ln pi pi2

Bombax ceiba 11.11 27.78 250.0 7.964 -0.137 0.0019

Borassus flabellifer 27.78 100 360.0 23.28 -0.291 0.0249

Butea superba 38.89 50 128.6 25.13 -0.2 0.0062

Carica papaya 44.44 88.89 200.0 27.29 -0.276 0.0197

Casuarina equisetifolia 16.67 55.56 333.3 17.52 -0.213 0.0077

Cleistanthus collinus 16.67 27.78 166.7 9.512 -0.137 0.0019

Cocos nucifera 83.33 522.2 626.7 108.6 -0.159 0.6799

Dalbergia paniculata 16.67 33.33 200.0 10.42 -0.155 0.0028

Delonix regia 27.78 50 180.0 19.7 -0.2 0.0062

Emblica officinalis 33.33 38.89 116.7 15.23 -0.171 0.0038

Eucalyptus tereticornis 16.67 144.4 866.7 27.8 -0.337 0.052

Ficus hispida 27.78 55.56 200.0 17.34 -0.213 0.0077

Helicteres isora 16.67 33.33 200.0 12.73 -0.155 0.0028

Lannea coromandelica 11.11 33.33 300.0 8.321 -0.155 0.0028

Madhuca longifolia 27.78 55.56 200.0 16.76 -0.213 0.0077

Mangifera indica 27.78 266.7 960.0 50.13 -0.364 0.1773

Mimusops elengi 22.22 50 225.0 15.56 -0.2 0.0062

Moringa oleifera 38.89 77.78 200.0 23.07 -0.258 0.0151

Musa paradisiaca 50 355.6 711.1 73.24 -0.324 0.3152

Murraya koenigii 38.89 72.22 185.7 24.02 -0.248 0.013

Oroxylum indicum 27.78 27.78 100.0 24.32 -0.137 0.0019

Phyllanthus emblica 44.44 94.44 212.5 27.79 -0.284 0.0222

Psidium guajava 50 133.3 266.7 35.38 -0.328 0.0443

Punica granatum 33.33 33.33 100.0 15.24 -0.155 0.0028

Terminalia tomentosa 44.44 44.44 100.0 19.89 -0.186 0.0049

Wrightia tomentosa 22.22 50 225.0 14.97 -0.2 0.0062

Xylia xylocarpa 27.78 27.78 100.0 12.91 -0.137 0.0019

Ziziphus mauritiana 44.44 83.33 187.5 27.69 -0.267 0.0173

Total 1100 3200 9647 898.6 -7.777 1.5997

Thirty-four (34) species of trees, were observed while conducting biological studies in the buffer zone at selected locations. The density of shrubs varied from 28 trees/ha to 522 trees/ha. Highest density was shown by Cocos sp followed by Musa sp whereas lowest density was shown by Xylia, Cleistanthus, and Borassus species The strand density values for different species of trees was 3200 trees/ha

TABLE 37 PHYTOSOCIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF SHRUBS IN STUDY AREA

Shrub F D/ha A/ha IVI pi ln pi pi2

Abutilon indicum 16.67 0.278 1.7 2.206 1.754 3.96

Calotropis species 22.22 0.278 1.3 2.941 1.754 4.696

Cissus quadrangularis 5.556 0.056 1.0 0.735 0.351 1.086

Costus speciosus 16.67 0.167 1.0 2.206 1.053 3.259

Dodonaea viscosa 16.67 0.167 1.0 2.206 1.053 3.259

Grewia hirsuta 22.22 0.222 1.0 2.941 1.404 4.345

Lantana camara 22.22 0.333 1.5 2.941 2.105 5.046

Tamarix species 16.67 0.222 1.3 2.206 1.404 3.609

138.9 1.722 9.75 18.38 10.88 29.26

Eight (8) species of shrubs, were observed at selected locations in the buffer zone. The density of shrubs varied from 0.05 stems/ha to 0.33 stems/ha. Highest density was shown by Lantana sp followed by Abutilon and Calotropis and the lowest density is shown by



84

Cissus quadrangularis sp. The strand density values for different species of shrubs was 1.772 stems/ha

3.9.9 Agriculture The staple food of the people in the study region is rice and wheat. Agro-climatic conditions of the area provide a range of potentialities for growing cash crop like off seasonal vegetable i.e. onion, chilly, brinjal, benda, fruits and flowers, kitchen gardening is also common because of sufficient available space around house. The main cultivation in the study area is paddy, Pisiculture. Main agricultural crop production in study area is paddy (Oriza sativa) supplemented by wheat (Triticum aestivum). The common rabbi crops grown in the study area are wheat, gram, mustard, turmeric, potato, carrot, pea etc. whereas rice, jowar, groundnut, soyabean, chilly, ginger, etc are kharif crops. Other than cereals, fruits like mango, banana, lemon, papaya, sapota, and guava are also grown. The list of the agricultural crops in the study area is given in Table-38.

TABLE 38 : LIST OF AGRICULTURAL CROPS

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name

Rabi

Cereals

1 Triticum aestivum Wheat

2 Zea mays Maize

Pulses

1 Phaseolus sp Gram

Oil Seeds

Brassica juncea Mustard

Vegetables

1 Coriandrum anum Coriander

2 Allium sativum Garlic

3 Capsicum anum Chilly

4 Solanum tuberosum Potato

5 Daucus carata Carrot

6 Pisum sativum Pea

Kharif

Cereal

1 Oriza sativa Rice

2 Sorghum vulgarum Jowar

3 Cajanus cajan Pigeon pea

4 Phaseolus angularis Common beans

5 Phaseolus mungo Green gram

Oil seed

1 Seasamum sp Til

2 Arachys hypogea Groundnut

3 Glycine max Soya bean

Vegetables

1 Capsicum anum Chilly

2 Zingiber officinale Ginger

Others

1 Solanum tuberosam Potato

2 Saccarum officianalis Sugarcane



85

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name

3 Jute

Source: Directorate of Agriculture,AP

3.9.10 Fauna

Since the site is surrounding area mainly encompasses agriculture area and aquaculture ponds, common faunal species are expected from the site and vicinity. The study of fauna was undertaken at the proposed site. The land is mostly occupied with non-urban settings, agricultural and natural vegetation. The climatic conditions vegetation’s and presence of some water bodies highly supports the population of birds as well as some mammals at the nearby vegetation areas. Considerable numbers of domestic animals mainly cow, goat and buffalos were observed. The overall picture about fauna in the study area is herbivorous (tamed) animals are dominant over the carnivorous animals. Information was collected on the livestock, fisheries and indigenous fauna of the locality from the respective State/Central Government departments. The lists of animal species recorded in study area during study period are presented in Table-39.

3.9.10.1 Mammals The study area mainly consists of moist mixed deciduous and tropical evergreen type of Vegetation. Therefore, biodiversity in this region is good and various types of mammals are found. Mammals like monkeys, squirrels, giant squirrel, and rats are common in this study area.

3.9.10.2 Avifauna Rich vegetation and presence of water bodies supports diverse avifauna species in the study area. Parrot, House Sparrow, and Cranes and Peafowl are resident birds. Dominant birds observed at the study area are House Sparrow Indian Roller, Red Vented Bulbul, Hornbill; Golden backed Woodpecker, Black Drongo, Koel, Green bee-eater, cattle egret, Indian myna and common Babbler. These birds were found in the close association with man and cattle. Most of these birds recorded in the study area are omnivorous in habit preferring grains, insects, and worms etc. as their principal food.

3.9.10.3 Reptiles In reptiles, garden lizard and Indian chameleon were observed in every sampling location. In snake Python, Cobra, and Vipers like kraits and Russell’s viper is noted during personal interviewing with local peoples. Common rat snake is observed during field survey.

3.9.10.4 Amphibians Two species of frogs were seen during evening time in the study area. These are Cricket Frog (Fejervarya limnocharis), and Indian Bull Frog (Hoplobatrachus tigerinus).

3.9.10.5 Animal Husbandry The study area includes mostly non-urban area where cattle wealth is of great importance to the economy of the study region especially in agriculture. Every farmer usually has at least a cow or buffalo or a pair of bullocks, which perform a variety of functions, chief among them being ploughing, harrowing, and carrying Bullock-carts, agricultural



86

implements, milk etc. Agriculture is up to an appreciable extent. Goats and Pigs are used mainly for meat purpose. Live stock rising is an economic activity persuaded by certain sections community, who have made grazing and breeding of livestock as their traditional occupation. Livestock has proved to be a very valuable asset to the farmers. It provides them with the draught power required for cultivation, and an additional means of supplementing their income.

TABLE 39 FAUNA RECORDED IN THE STUDY AREA

Since the District is mainly involved in the pisciculture, marine fishes commonly found are enlisted bellow. Prawn and crabs reported from the region are also enlisted in the Table 40.

TABLE 40 : AQUATIC FAUNA OF THE STUDY AREA

S. No. Genus / Species English Name

1 Panulirus polyphyrus Banded spiny lobster

2 Sphyraena jello Berracuda

3 Shiomatu niger Black pomfret

4 Carans carangus Black tail fravelly

5 Cypselurus cyanopterus Blue spot flying fish

6 Harpodon neherius Bombay duck

7 Auxis rochei Bullet tuna

8 Anadontostoma chacunda Chacunda gizzard shad

9 Sepia aculata Cuttle fish

10 Strooplus suratensis Danded butter fish

11 Liognathus duseumieri Dussumier‟s pony fish

12 Mugil cephalus Flat head grey mullet

13 Lates calcarifer Gaint sea perch, Bekti

14 Trypencach vegina Goby

15 Colia dussunieri Gold potted graindier anchovy

S. No. Common Name Scientific Name IWPA / IUCN Status

1 Grey Heron Ardea cinerea Schedule-IV

2 Pond Heron Ardeola grayii Schedule-IV

3 Purple Heron Ardea purpurea Schedule-IV

4 Babbler Turdoides spp. Schedule-IV

5 Black Bittern Ixobrychus flavicollis Schedule-IV

6 Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis Schedule-IV

7 Chestnut Bittern Ixobrychus cinnamoneus Schedule-IV

8 Grey Heron Ardea cinerea Schedule-IV

9 Hill myna Gracula spp. Schedule-I

10 Hoopoe Upupa spp. Schedule-IV

11 Jungle fowl Gallus spp. Schedule-IV

12 Koel Eudynamys scolopaceus Schedule-IV

13 Large Egret Ardea alba Schedule-IV

14 Little Bittern Ixotrychus minutus Schedule-IV

15 Little Egret Egretta garzetta Schedule-IV

16 Night Heron Nycticorax nycticorax Schedule-IV

17 Painted Stork Mycteria leucocephala Schedule-IV (Near Threatened)

18 Peafowl Pavo cristatus Schedule-I

19 Yellow Bittern Ixobrychus sinensis Schedule-IV



87

S. No. Genus / Species English Name

16 Elepes para Golden scad

17 Rhinobates granulatus Granulated shovel nose ray

18 Saurida tumble Greater lizard fish

19 Pesettodes erumei Indian nailout

20 Anguilla nebulosa Long finned eel

21 Chanosachos Milk fishes

22 Scomberomorus commerson Narrow baried seer fish

23 Acetus indicus Paste shrimp

24 Upenus indicus Red mullet Indian gous fishes

25 Saylla Serrate mudcrab

26 Polynemus heptadactylue Seven finger thread fin

27 Lutjanus join Shaper (Jew fish)

28 Caroharis sorrah Shark

29 Chrirocentras derab Silver bar, wolf herring

30 Arjus Jalla Small eye cat fish

31 Bragocephatus inermis Smooth backed blow fish

32 Instinophorus pla-typtorus Soil fish, peacock seer

33 Sca-tephagus arugus Spotted butter fish

34 Drepane pantata Spotteu sickle fish

35 Khipias gladias Sword fish

36 Himantura blockeri Whip tail sting ray

37 Lactarius lactarius White fish

TABLE 41 : PRAWNS AND CRABS REPORTED FROM THE PROJECT REGION

S. No. Common Name Scientific Name

1 Brown shrimp Metapenaeus affinis

2 Yellow prawn Metapenaeus brevicornis

3 Green tiger prawn or grooved tiger prawn Penaeus semisulcatus

4 Indian prawn Penaeus indicus

5 Giant tiger prawn Penaeus monodon

6 Speckled shrimp, brown shrimp Metapenaeus monoceros

7 Kadal shrimp Metapenaeus dobsoni

8 Banana shrimp Penaeus merguiensis

9 Rainbow Shrimp Parapenaeopsis sculptilis

10 Spear shrimp Parapenaeopsis hardwickii

11 Kiddi prawn Parapenaeopsis stylifera

12 Wrinkled swimming crab or rock crab Charybdis natator

13 Banded-legged swimming crab Charybdis annulata

14 Giant mud crab Scylla serrata

15 Flower crab Portunus pelagicus

16 red-spotted swimming crab Portunus sanguinolentus

3.9.10.6 Status of Threatened and Endemic Biodiversity

Faunal threat status has been assessed as per Indian Wild Life Protection Act (IWPA), 1972 and Red List of IUCN.

3.9.10.7 Habitats and Sensitivity of the Study Area LISS zone of the project area possess major Upputeru river (approx. 3.8 km) and other smaller rivers like Kukkaleru & Darbharevu (backwaters), Enamaduru drain, Upputeru



88

Reserved Forests, dense scrub vegetation, aquaculture ponds (adjacent to site), agriculture area / plantation, Casuarina plantation along the coastal habitats. No mangroves exists in the 10 km. Radius area / buffer zone.

3.9.11 Aquatic Ecological Status: Primary Survey

3.9.11.1 Introduction

The impact of pollution on aquatic ecosystem manifests itself first on the biotic aquatic communities. The species composition of aquatic organisms in natural communities is directly influenced by ambient water quality. The responses of plants to pollutants, when measured quantitatively give an insight about the conditions of existing aquatic ecosystem.

3.9.11.2 Plankton Study

Protecting the environment and making efficient use of natural resources are two of the most pressing demands in the present stage of social development. The task of preserving the purity of the atmosphere and water basins is of both national and global significance since there are no boundaries to the propagation of anthropogenic contaminants in the water. An essential pre requisite for the successful solution to these problems is to evaluate ecological impacts from the baseline information and undertake effective management plan. So the objective of aquatic ecological study may be outlined as follows:

To characterize water bodies like fresh waters;

To understand their present biological status;

To characterize water bodies with the help of biota; and future impacts if any To meet these objectives following methods were followed:

Generating data by actual field sampling and analysis in these areas through field visits during study period; and

Discussion with local people to get the information for aquatic plants and aquatic animals.

To fulfill these objectives and to understand the present status of aquatic ecosystem, samples were collected from different River water system (river) under investigation. In order to get a clear picture and to assess the various parameters of water, three sampling locations were identified for sampling. Samples were collected during study period. The sampling locations are presented in Table-42.

TABLE 42 : DETAILS OF AQUATIC SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Locations Coordinates

AE-1 Near Kottata 16º 23’ 23.66”N, 81 º 32’ 45.33” E

AE-2 Near Bridge, Kalipatnam 16º 22’ 43.73”N, 81 º 30’ 59.19” E

AE-3 Near Losar Bridge, Before Lakshmipuram 16º 23’ 54.35”N, 81 º 28’ 10.32” E

3.9.11.3 Methodology Adopted for Aquatic Studies

The biological species specific for a particular environmental conditions are the best indicators of environmental quality. This includes different biological species such as phytoplankton, zooplankton and bacteria. Diatoms, desmids and dinophyceaen members are indicative of clean water conditions. Increasing dominance of diatoms, ciliates, flagellates, chlorophycean and cyanophycean species indicates progressively increasing trophic conditions. Presence of Euglenophyceae indicates high eutrophic conditions. Planktonic rotifers are usually more abundant in fresh



89

water than estuarine waters. It is believed that when crustacean and insect out number other groups the situation reflects the enriched organic conditions of water. Thus, of certain organisms help in classifying water body in trophic levels on knowing its physico chemical characteristics.

The plankton samples were collected by using plankton net. The filamentous algae and debris were avoided by filtering through the plankton net. The collected sample was condensed to 100 ml by filtration and the samples were preserved using pinch of Rose Bengal and 10 ml of 4% formaldehyde solution.

For the measurement of frequencies of various forms of Phytoplankton and Zooplankton, one drop of the sedimented plankton was mounted on a micro-slide, as many as 20 different microscopic fields situated at more or less even distances from each other were examined, and numbers of individual organisms are counted. The plankton forms were identified up to species level and expressed as organisms per milliliter of the sample Phytoplankton The details of Phytoplankton Count is Table-43 and Distribution of Chlorophyll and Primary productivity in Table-44

TABLE 43 : PHYTOPLANKTON COUNT IN STUDY AREA

Groups AE1 AE2 AE3

Chlorophyceae 61.09 65.52 49.23

Xanthophyceae - - 2.81

Bacillariophyceae 31.33 28.85 43.16

Chrysophyceae - - -

Cryptophyceae - - -

Dinophyceae 0.46 - -

Euglenophyceae 4.14 0.709 -

Myxophyceae 3.2 5.5 4.6

Protozoans & others - - 2.1

Total Count/ml 12152 13528 11992

No. of Species 26 32 30

Shannon-weaver Index 4.2 3.59 3.11

Major Species Chlamydomonas Chlamydomonas Synedra

TABLE 44 : DISTRIBUTION OF CHLOROPHYLL-A (CHL A) MG/M

3 AND PRIMARY

PRODUCTION (PP) MG C / M3 DAY

-1

Station No Chlorophyll-a (mg/m3) Primary Production mg C / m

3 day

-1

AEI 1.52 225

AE3 1.83 320

AE4 3.22 415

Results and Discussions

Total phytoplankton count observed is in the range of 11992 to 13528

A total of 32 species were recorded across the 3 transects studied

The data at all the stations indicated organisms like Chlamydomonas, and Synedra as major species

In general, station wise variation in phytoplankton cell are well in the range of general distribution of phyto-planktons.

There were no endemic organisms recorded during the observation



90

The rate of primary productivity measured is presented in the table above along with Chl-a concentrations.

Chlorophyll-a level of study area is high ranging from 1.52 to 3.22 and comparative rate of primary production is moderately high ranging from 225 to 415 mg C /m

3/day

In general the water column is healthy Zooplankton

The details of Zooplankton count is provided in Table 45

TABLE 45 : ZOOPLANKTON BIOMASS (M-3

) AND NUMERICAL COUNTS (100/M3)

Taxa AE1 AE2 AE3

Ctenophora 1211 927 752

Polychaeta 107 0 306

Copepoda 27148 27315 26172

Cladocera 207 506 218

Decapoda 717 1240 1136

Amphipoda 134 175 328

Ostracoda 203 1390 188

Euphausiacea 0 0 0

Mysidacea 56 128 156

Sergestidae 6347 9152 7323

Lamellibranchiate 12 266 94

Gastropod larvae 0 85 0

Chaetognatha 1630 1580 2218

Echinoderm larvae 107 176 0

Invertebrate eggs 337 1168 528

Fish eggs 51 126 119

Fish larvae 63 85 54

Total No 100/m3 38330 44319 39592

Total number of groups 15 15 14

Results and Discussions

The total counts of zooplanktons ranged between 39275 – 72385 / 100 m3 during study

period

Copepods and Sergestidae were the most abundant groups followed by Chaetognathae

A total of 15 major groups were observed in the samples taken in the study period

3.9.12 Conclusion As per primary survey and secondary data referred, it was concluded that the study areas flora and fauna is ecologically rich and is not equally distributed throughout the study area. In fact the vegetation is distributed to certain pockets and most of the study area consists of aqua cultural ponds. Fauna consists of birds, reptiles, primates; Rattle Snakes, Cobra are few species found in the vicinity of the project site.



91

3.10 Socio Economic Environment 3.10.1 Introduction

The proposed project is for Establishment of EPS at ‘BTSAD’ Bhimavaram. Project location is at village Barrevanipeta, mandal Bhimavaram, and district West Godavari. Barrevanipeta village population is 320; it’s a small hamlet coming under Losarigutlapadu gram panchayat. The growth of industrial sectors and infrastructure developments in and around the agriculture dominant areas, villages and towns is bound to create its impact on the socio-economic aspects of the local population. The impacts may be positive or negative depending upon the developmental activity. To assess the impacts on the socio-economics of the local people, it is necessary to study the existing socio-economic status of the local population, which will be helpful for making efforts to further improve the quality of life in the area of study.

To study the socio-economic aspects of people in the study area around the proposed project site, the required data has been collected from various secondary sources and supplemented by the primary data generated through the process of a limited door to door socio-economic survey.

3.10.2 Desktop Study The methodology adopted to collect secondary data/information on socio-economic area as given below. The aim of the present study was to identify the population details, literacy details, employment pattern, infrastructure facilities and land use pattern etc. All details were taken from primary census abstract 2011 and district census handbook 2011 .The desktop study was performed in 10 km radius study area map Primary data collection secondary data collection

3.10.3 Methodology for Primary Data Collection For the primary data collection, structured questionnaires will be used by survey team. There were three types of formats has been prepared for the survey purpose, these were Household survey format, Focus group discussion format and village leader format. All these formats will include all type of village information like demographic details, infrastructure details etc. For household survey, surveyor will visit to household’s house. For focus group discussion male, female group were interviewed in open spaces like community hall, school ground, temple, panchayat hall etc. For the selection of respondents random sampling used by surveyor. Direct observation during transit walk in villages, telephonic calls to peruse information is also comes under the primary data collection, these methods also a part of primary data collection. The 10 km radial study area map is distributed in 2 zones (1-5 & 5-10 km). In 0-1 km zone there is only 1 small hamlet falling namely Barrevanipeta, therefore 0-1 km zone details are not presented in the study area details. There are 2 Mandal’s falling in the study area from West Godavari district, namely Bhimavaram & Mogalthur. Most of the areas falling in hamlets category, 9 villages and 22 hamlets falling in the study area.



92

3.10.3.1 Hamlet details According to district census handbook 2011, villages coming under Gram Panchayats are called hamlets. There are total 22 hamlets existing in the study area. Details of hamlets are presented below.

TABLE 46 : ADMINISTRATIVE DETAILS OF THE STUDY AREA

Sr.No Village Code Village Name Hamlet Name Distance from the

BTSAD (in km)

1 588730 Losarigutlapadu Gutlapadu 5

2 588730 Losarigutlapadu Kottapusalamuru 7

3 588730 Losarigutlapadu Tokatippa 5

4 588730 Losarigutlapadu Domapindi 10

5 588730 Losarigutlapadu Losari 9

6 588730 Losarigutlapadu Barrevanipeta 7

7 588730 Losarigutlapadu Nagidi palem 7

8 588730 Losarigutlapadu Deyyalatippa 9

9 588730 Losarigutlapadu Vinayakapuram 7

10 588730 Losarigutlapadu Gdlavanitippa 2

11 588750 Kalipatnam Daritippa 2.5

12 588750 Kalipatnam Patapadu 7

13 588750 Mutyalapalle Kothota 1

14 588750 Mutyalapalle Modi 2

15 588740 Kalavapudi S.C.bose mil colony 3

16 588740 Kalavapudi Gogutippa 8

17 588740 Vempa Sriramapuram 2

18 588750 Bondada Mekaladibba 7

19 588770 Vemuladeevi Marrithippa 2

20 588730 Losarigutlapadu Deyyalatippa 9

21 588740 Dirusumarru Ramabhadrapuram 2

22 588740 Vempa Sriramapuram 2

Source: Primary census abstract 2011, district West Godavari, Andhra Pradesh 3.10.3.2 Demographic details

Total population of the 9 villages is 85,443; out of the total population 42,861 are male and 42,582 female. Total households are 24,350 with an average family size of 3.50.0-6 child population is 8,430 which is 10% of total population. SC population is 7,190(8.41%) and ST population is 364(0.42%).Total literates are 53,048(62%) and illiterates are 32,395.

3.10.3.3 Employment pattern Total worker population in the study area is 40,863, which is (48%) of total population. Main workers are 30,580 (36%) and marginal workers are 10283(12%).Total non-working population is 44,580(52%). In main workers employment pattern cultivator population is 4,087(13%), agricultural workers population is 18,399 (60%), household industry workers are 183 (1%)sand other workers are 7,911(26%).Above given data indicates the study area is mainly depend on agriculture and its allied activities.



93

3.10.4 Infrastructure Facilities The District Census Handbook (DCHB) is an important publication of the Census Organization. The scope and coverage of Village Directory of 2011 DCHB has been widened by including a number of new amenities in addition to those of 2001. DCHB describes the availability or non-availability of amenities in the villages, its gives a view to know the condition of the villages. The infrastructure details of 9 villages in the study area are presented below.

3.10.4.1 Education facilities

According to DCHB 2011, all 9 villages availing primary school and anganwadi facility, middle school presented in 8 villages and secondary school in 7 villages. Nearest town for higher studies is Bhimavaram town. Details are presented below: TABLE 47 : EDUCATION FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km Govt Primary School Govt Middle School Govt Secondary School

1-5 2 2 2

5-10 7 6 5

0-10 9 8 7

TABLE 48 : POPULATION AND LITERACY DETAILS

S. No

Mandal Village code

Name Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1-5 km

1 Mogalthur 588753 Kalipatnam

Rural 3378

11839 5832 6007

1183 944 47 7246 4593

2 Bhimavaram

588735

Losarigutlapadu

Rural 6390

22831

11467

11364

2274

1545 75

14022 8809

Sub Total 9768 3467

0 1729

9 1737

1 345

7 248

9 122

21268

13402

5-10 km

3 Bhimavaram

588734 Anakoderu

Rural

1669 5697 2877 2820 571 328 12 3701 1996

4 Bhimavaram

588733 Komarada

Rural

680 2289 1172 1117 216 65 69 1580 709

5 Bhimavaram

588732 Yenamadurru

Rural

1156 3878 1954 1924 349 472 20 2602 1276

6 Bhimavaram

588736 Dirusumarru

Rural

2509 8645 4358 4287 852 339 55 5568 3077

7 Bhimavaram

588739 Vempa

Rural

1992 6892 3404 3488 716 213

6 22 4547 2345

8 Mogalthur 588754 Mutyalapalle

Rural

2960 1090

6 5526 5380

1166

237 36 6182 4724

9 Mogalthur 588757 Perupalem

Rural

3616 1246

6 6271 6195

1103

1124

28 7600 4866

Sub Total 1458

2 5077

3 2556

2 2521

1 497

3 470

1 242

31780

18993

Grand Total 2435 8544 4286 4258 843 719 36 5304 3239

https://www.google.com.vn/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=2&ved=0ahUKEwjN6JOg2oLUAhVGKZQKHXvDDHUQFgg0MAE&url=https://www.safefamiliesforchildren.com/news/gods-not-looking-for-your-ability-but-your-availability/&usg=AFQjCNESs3SNyAVqVWseydSFxhCdxuGqrg



94

S. No

Mandal Village code

Name Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 3 1 2 0 0 4 8 5

Source Primary census abstract 2011, district West Godavari, AP Note: 1=No_HH: Number of household, 2=TOT_P: Total Population, 3=TOT_M: Total Male, 4=TOT_F: Total Female, 5=P_06: 0-6 child population, 6=P_SC: Population SC, 7=P_ST: Population ST, 8=P_LIT: Population Literate, 9=P_ILL: Population Illiterate

TABLE 49 : EMPLOYMENT PATTERN

Sr. No Mandal Village code Name Type Total Workers

Total Main Marginal Non

1-5 km

1 Mogalthur 588753 Kalipatnam Rural 5384 3354 2030 6455

2 Bhimavaram 588735 Losarigutlapadu Rural 10831 9253 1578 12000

Sub Total 16215 12607 3608 18455

5-10 km

3 Bhimavaram 588734 Anakoderu Rural 2708 2360 348 2989

4 Bhimavaram 588733 Komarada Rural 1039 986 53 1250

5 Bhimavaram 588732 Yenamadurru Rural 1901 1828 73 1977

6 Bhimavaram 588736 Dirusumarru Rural 4070 3750 320 4575

7 Bhimavaram 588739 Vempa Rural 3408 2974 434 3484

8 Mogalthur 588754 Mutyalapalle Rural 5313 2753 2560 5593

9 Mogalthur 588757 Perupalem Rural 6209 3322 2887 6257

Sub Total 24648 17973 6675 26125

Grand Total 40863 30580 10283 44580

Source: Source Primary census abstract 2011, district West Godavari, AP

TABLE 50 : EMPLOYMENT & MAIN WORKER EMPLOYMENT PATTERN

Sr. No

Mandal Village code

Name Type

Main Worker Employment Pattern

Cultivators Agricultural Household

Industry Other

1-5 km

1 Mogalthur 588753 Kalipatnam Rural 623 1360 25 1346

2 Bhimavaram 588735 Losarigutlapadu Rural 976 6899 35 1343

Sub Total 1599 8259 60 2689

5-10 km

3 Bhimavaram 588734 Anakoderu Rural 154 1840 12 354

4 Bhimavaram 588733 Komarada Rural 129 603 3 251

5 Bhimavaram 588732 Yenamadurru Rural 361 1197 12 258

6 Bhimavaram 588736 Dirusumarru Rural 381 2651 16 702

7 Bhimavaram 588739 Vempa Rural 489 2103 15 367

8 Mogalthur 588754 Mutyalapalle Rural 504 1066 35 1148

9 Mogalthur 588757 Perupalem Rural 470 680 30 2142

Sub Total 2488 10140 123 5222

Grand Total 4087 18399 183 7911



95

3.10.4.2 Health facilities: In 9 villages, total 10 sub health centres are providing health care facilities.1 PHC is availed at Losarigutlapadu gram panchyat. In addition 7 mobile health clinics also providing medical facilities. Details are presented below:

TABLE 51 : HEALTH FACILITIES IN NUMBERS

Zone in km Primary Health

Centre Primary Health

Sub Centre Veterinary Hospital

Mobile Health Clinic

1-5 1 9 2 2

5-10 0 10 3 5

0-10 1 19 5 7

3.10.4.3 Drinking water facilities

All 9 villages getting treated tap water facility, other sources are well, hand pump, river & tank water. Details are presented below:

TABLE 52 : DRINKING WATER FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km Tap Water Covered Well Hand Pump River/ Canal Tank/ Pond/ Lake

1-5 2 1 1 1 1

5-10 7 2 2 5 5

0-10 9 3 3 6 6

3.10.4.4 Drainage Facility

In all villages, there is a mixed type of drainage pattern observed, details of drainage pattern is presented below:

TABLE 53 : DRAINAGE FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km

Closed Drainage

Open Drainage Open Pucca Drainage Uncovered

Open Kuccha Drainage

1-5 2 2 1 2

5-10 2 7 5 7

0-10 4 9 6 9

3.10.4.5 Communication facility

Out of 9 villages in 5 villages post office and sub post office facility is presented, all villages are connected through land-line and PCOs. Details are presented below:

TABLE 54 : COMMUNICATION FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km Post Office Sub Post Office Telephone Public Call Office

1-5 1 1 2 2

5-10 2 1 7 7

0-10 3 2 9 9

3.10.4.6 Transportation facilities

All villages are well connected with public, private bus service and autos. Nearest railway station facility is at a distance of 8-10 km in Bhimavaram town.



96

TABLE 55 : TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km Public Bus Service Private Bus Service Auto/Modified Autos

1-5 2 2 2

5-10 7 7 7

0-10 9 9 9

3.10.4.7 Road facilities

All types of roads are presented in the villages in the form of black topped road, gravel road, footpath etc.

TABLE 56 : ROAD FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km Black Topped Road Gravel Roads Water Bounded Macadam Footpath

1-5 2 2 2 2

5-10 7 7 6 7

0-10 9 9 8 9

3.10.4.8 Banking facility

Commercial, co-operative banks are presented in the villages, with addition 2 agricultural credit societies are also presented in the study area.

TABLE 57 : BANKING FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km Commercial Bank Cooperative Bank Agricultural Credit Societies

1-5 2 1 1

5-10 3 3 1

0-10 5 4 2

3.10.4.9 Power facility

All villages availed power supply facilities for all type of uses eg. Domestic, agricultural, commercial etc.

TABLE 58 : POWER FACILITIES IN NUMBER OF VILLAGES

Zone in km

Power Supply For Domestic Use

Power Supply For Agriculture Use

Power Supply For Commercial Use

Power Supply For All Users

1-5 2 2 2 2

5-10 7 7 7 7

0-10 9 9 9 9

3.10.4.10 Main commodities details

Main commodities details has been taken from district census handbook 2011 of West Godavari, AP. Main commodity of the study area is paddy.47% of land area is coming under sown area. Other crops cultivated are Bean and Husk. This data indicates majority of the workers are engaged in agricultural activities. Majority of the area irrigated by canal water.



97

FIGURE 27 : STUDY AREA SE SURVEY PHOTOGRAPHS

Aquaculture Activity

Living Condition

Agriculture Activity Discussion with villagers



98

3.10.5 Need Based Assessment

The following representatives of the villages were interviewed during the survey: 1.R.RamachandraRao- Sarpanch of Deyyalatippa 2.R. Srinivas- Farmer 3.Rajanna-Farmer 4.Janardhan-Farmer 5.Yadamma-House wife 6.Srikanth- Student 7.Ramulu-Daily Labour 8.Vijaya Laxmi- House wife 9.Narsimha- Farmer

3.10.5.1 Main problems and needs of the villages

In the village Deyyalatippa villagers having problem with power lines which are

aligned in lower elevation as a result few people were died, they already raised complaint against this issue to the concern authority but problem is not resolved yet.

Asking for the water tanker capacity to increase, and drinking water facility. No public transportation facility available, people using local autos for transportation People preferring to do aquaculture instead of agriculture as aquaculture is

profitable then agriculture. As a result all fertile lands converting in to aquaculture and agriculture activity is decreased. Lands adjacent to the aquaculture are getting polluted and loosing it’s fertility.

Ground water is polluting by aquaculture activity. Villagers need an ATM or bank facility at nearby places. Villagers expecting employment from the industries around them. For few villages industries sponsored Roads as a part of CSR activities, villagers

expressing they have not received all the promises by the industries. No high school facilities available for their village.

3.10.5.2 Conclusion

Study area is rural dominant and main employment pattern is agriculture and its allied activities. More than 50% working population are engaged as a labour worker in agriculture farms. Bhimavaram town which is at an average distance of 10-15 km from the project site is main centre for all types of higher facilities for the study area population. Employment pattern as well as literacy rate is satisfactory in the villages. All villagers availed treated tap water for drinking purpose. Transportation facility is presented in all villages through public and private bus facilities.

For the project purpose manpower requirement can be fulfilled from the study area. Project activities will generate employment (skilled, semi-skilled, unskilled).As a part of CSR activities, ONGC will take care of infrastructural development of surrounding villages. Overall the project will bring development and improvement in quality of life in the surrounding villages.

3.11 Hazards of the Proposed Project Area

The study area falls in seismic zone III as per the Seismic Map of India, IS 1893(Part I): 2002. There is Moderate damage risk due to the earthquakes in the area as provided in Figure 28. The project Area has no affect due to floods as shown in Figure 29. As per the



99

Cyclone Hazard Map the Area falls under High Damage Risk Zone - B (Vb=50m/s) as provided in Figure 30. Multi Hazard Map in Figure 31 shows that the project area falls in Moderate Risk Zone due to multiple Hazards.

FIGURE 28 : EARTHQUAKE MAP

FIGURE 29 FLOOD HAZARD MAP



100

FIGURE 30 : CYCLONE HAZARD MAP

FIGURE 31 : CYCLONE HAZARD MAP


Chapter-4: Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

101

4. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 Preamble

This chapter defines the details of investigated environmental impacts due to project location, possible accidents, project design, project construction, regular operations, final decommissioning or rehabilitation of a completed project and measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse impacts identified.

4.2 Impact Assessment Methodology The present EIA report follows the impact assessment methodology based on checklist and matrix methods. The major steps followed for impact assessment are given as under:

Listing of environmental aspects, i.e., project activities that can cause environmental impacts

Identification of applicable environmental attributes on which the environmental aspects can cause an environmental impact

Impact Assessment (Aspect-Impact Analysis): o Qualification as negative or positive; o Identification of nature of impacts such as direct or indirect; o Quantitative Analysis, viz., quantification of impacts and discussion on the direct

and indirect environmental and socio-economic impacts o Assessment of significance of impacts based on severity and frequency of identified

impacts: a scale is used to determine the severity of the effect; for example, an impact is of low, medium, or high significance.

Mitigation measures to address the assessed impacts and a detailed Environmental Management Plan are proposed. A monitoring plan for implementation of the proposed EMP is then proposed.

4.3 Identification of Impacts The environmental impacts anticipated during the construction and operation phases on the environmental parameters have been studied to estimate the environmental impact of the proposed project. Various project activities that can cause environmental impacts are identified as under:

1. Pre Commissioning Stage

Detailed Topographic Survey

Land Acquirement

Site Clearing

Site Preparation

2. Construction / Establishment

Civil works such as earth moving and building of structures including temporary structures

Construction of access road

Heavy Equipment operations

Influx of construction workers

Transportation of material



102

Setting up the foundation, handrails, guardrails, stairs, walkways, ladders, flare stack & other equipment and machinery

3. Operation and Maintenance

Movement of fuel reserves

Flaring

Operation of power source and generator facilities

Storage of chemicals/ flammables

Waste generation

Storage and Handling of Crude ONGC

Depletion of water resources due to use of water for drilling operations

Vehicular movement for transportation of material, equipment and personnel

4. Decommissioning and Site Restoration

Demolishing civil and mechanical structures

Disposal of demolished material

4.4 Identification of Environmental Attributes Environmental attributes or Valued Environmental Components (VECs) considered for the proposed project are the receiving environmental and social components, which are likely to get affected due to the project operations/ activities. Components of natural resources and human world that are considered valuable and are likely to be affected by the project activities have been considered for the EIA study. Value may be attributed for economic, social, environmental, aesthetic or ethical reasons. These attributes represent the investigative focal point for further EIA process. The indirect and/or cumulative effects can be concerned with indirect, additive or even synergistic effects due to other projects or activities or even induced developments on the same environmental components as would be considered direct effects. But such impacts tend to involve larger scale environmental components such as within entire region, river basins or watersheds; and, broad social and economic parameters such as quality of life and the provincial economy. Once these components are identified then appropriate indicators are selected for impact assessments on the respective environmental attributes. Environmental attributes are broadly classified into three groups, viz., physical environment, biological environment and socio-economic environment.

4.5 Identification of Environmental Impacts The environmental impacts anticipated during the project phases on the environmental parameters have been studied to estimate the environmental impact of the proposed project. For establishing significance of different impacts, understanding the responses and interaction of the environmental system is essential. Hence, the impact interactions and pathways are to be understood and established first. Such an understanding will help in the assessment process to quantify the impact as accurately as possible. It is not sufficient to simply state the significance of the effect. This determination must be justified, coherent and documented, notably by a determination methodology, which must



103

be described in the methodology section of the report. There are many recognized methodologies to determine the significance of effects.

4.6 Air Environment

4.6.1 Identification of Impacts Ambient air quality effects are normally assessed in relation to their potential to cause to health deterioration and nuisance in local communities, on-site workers and damage to vegetation.

Impact on Climate The maximum temperatures of the exit gas from the Gas Engine stack and flare stack will be around 500°C and 900°C respectively. There will be contribution to green-house gas emission and consequent impact on global warming. The impact on local or global climate will be significant.

Source Emissions Air pollution during commissioning stage would be primarily due to fugitive emissions from vehicular movement, site preparation activities and material handling. These emissions only have nuisance factor affecting workers at site. Use of dust masks would be adequate to mitigate impacts on workers. The flaring of oil and gas is continuous activity. Wherever, required special precautions will be taken to minimize the impact on the local environment and habitat. Fugitive emissions in the form of material dust are expected during laying of foundation for EPS. Some fugitive emissions are also anticipated from storages of volatile chemicals and fuel at the site if the storages are not properly capped or are handled without due care. However, such emissions will not disperse widely and can only affect workers and people at site. Fugitive emissions during EPS operations are however not as significant as during site preparation. Fugitive emissions during foundation are not expected to travel beyond project boundaries. Workers working near fugitive emission sources are only susceptible which would be mitigated through use of PPEs in these areas. Fugitive emissions of VOC may result from the vents from the venting of un-burnt methane from EPS.

Flaring and Venting of Hydrocarbons Emissions are expected during flaring in EPS Operation, which will contribute to additional air pollution in terms of release of unburnt hydrocarbons. Flaring will involve high temperature oxidation process to burn combustible gases that may be generated from the proposed EPS. Principal pollutants from these air emission sources include: Nitrogen oxides, Sulfur oxides, Carbon monoxide and particulates and additional pollutants like Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), Methane, Ethane, Benzene, Ethyl benzene, Toluene, and xylenes (BTEX), etc. A flare stack of minimum 30 m height or higher will be provided in Flare System near EPS. Gas Engine will be provided with a 10m stack.

Emissions from Vehicles/ Machineries Vehicular emissions will be emitted from the vehicles used for the transport of construction material and equipment, workers and the machinery to and from the site.



104

As the vehicles used at site will be PUC certified and well maintained, the effect will be reduced to some extent.

4.6.2 Prediction of Impacts Substantial impacts on ambient air quality due to the proposed project activities at various stages like vehicle movement during site preparation, commissioning, operation and restoration, operation of gas based power plant of 0.5MW, flaring operation are expected. The impacts on AAQ due to the proposed EPS have been identified as given in Table 59.

TABLE 59 : AAQ Impact Identification

S. No Project Activities Aspects Environmental Impacts

1.0 Preparation at site

1.1 Clearance of vegetation at site and preparation of approach roads

Release of fugitive emissions

Impact on ambient air quality; Impact on aesthetics, land use, flora and fauna

1.2 Vehicle movement for transportation of EPS, materials and equipment

Release of air emissions including SO2 and NO2

Impact on ambient air quality; Impact on human health, flora and fauna

1.3 Excavation and paving of site

Release of fugitive air emissions

Impact on ambient air quality; Impact on human health, flora and fauna, soil quality, visibility, aesthetics

2.0 Foundation

2.1 Setting up of the foundation for establishing EPS

Release of air emissions


3.0 Operation of EPS, Flaring,

Release of air emissions including particulate matter and various gases


4.0 Operation of Gas based Engine for Gas based power plant


Impact on ambient air quality; Impact on human health, flora and fauna and aesthetics

5.0 Closure Phase Release of fugitive air emissions


5.1 Vehicle movement for transportation of EPS, materials and equipment


Impact on ambient air quality; Impact on human health, flora and fauna

The proposed project process involving AAQ impacts are site preparation, Foundation, Operation of EPS, Operation of Gas based Engine for Gas based power plant and closure at site.



105

The main sources of continuous or non-continuous air emissions resulting from the proposed EPS activities include:

1. Operation of Gas Based Engines 2. Flaring and venting of hydrocarbons 3. Emissions from Vehicles/machineries 4. Fugitive emissions

For meeting power requirement gas based power plant of 0.5MW is proposed. Power requirement will be met by using 0.5MW Gas based power plant at EPS. These will be in operation 24 hours a day. Environmental impacts due to operation of the Gas Engine and Flare stack have thus been estimated. Flaring will be done which is a continuous activity wherein the gas produced will be burnt. Hydrocarbon in major portion with traces of NO2 will be burnt.

Proposed Stack Height Stack height of 30 m above roof/ridge level is proposed for Flare stack. Gas Engine Stack will be 10 m. The exhaust stacks will vent the emissions.

Study Area A 10 km radius area around the EPS site has been considered as study area to study the impacts on AAQ.

Ambient Air Quality Modelling The impact on air quality is assessed based on increase in emissions levels from the Flare stack operation and during emergency usage. Gas Engine Stack Operation. Impact predicted has been carried out for major Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) pollutant, viz., Oxides of Nitrogen (NO2), Sulphur dioxide (SO2), Carbon Monoxide (CO). The existing emissions from other industries within 10 km have been considered to be covered under the baseline scenario.

Model Input Data The air dispersion model is designed for multiple point sources, line sources and area sources and has been used for simulations from identified point sources. In the present prediction study, Flare Stack & Gas Engine of 0.5MW capacity has been considered. For prediction of impacts using the stimulation model, pollutants like SO2 and NO2 are considered for identified stacks. For model simulation study, a grid size of 1 km x 1 km has been considered, covering 10 km radius. Hourly mixing heights are taken from the “Atlas of hourly mixing height and assimilative capacity of atmosphere in India” by India Meteorological Department (IMD), 2008 New Delhi has been used. The meteorological data of the Winter season is used for modifying. The meteorological data recorded during study period on wind speed, wind direction, temperature etc., have been processed to extract the data required for simulation by the model. 24-Hourly mean Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) were estimated using the entire meteorological data of January & February 2018. Emergency Scenario occurs 2-5 % of the operation time of EPS



106

TABLE 60 : AIR EMISSION QUANTITIES

Stack description

Description No. of Stack

s

Fuel type

Fuel consum

ption

Flue Gas

NO2 Amou

nt (g/s)

SO2 Amou

nt (g/s)

Velocity m/s

Temperatur

e ºC

Diamete

r cm

Stack height

m Mass rate g/s)

Vol. rate m

3/s

Flare Stack (Normal operations) 1 NG 1.26 0.06 <0.01 <0.01 10 900 32 30

Flare Stack (Emergency operations)

One flare stack with two scenarios

1 NG 5865.63 197.53 8.8 0.08 40 900 32 30

Gas Engines (Power) 500 KW

One Gas Engine Stack

1 NG 232 7.84 0.35 <0.01 10 504 18 10

FIGURE 32 : ISOPLETHS FOR INCREMENTAL GLCS OF NO2 AT EPS FOR SC-I



107

FIGURE 33 : ISOPLETHS FOR INCREMENTAL GLCS OF NO2 AT EPS FOR SC-2



108

FIGURE 34 : ISOPLETHS FOR INCREMENTAL GLCS OF SO2 AT EPS FOR SC-2



109

o Modeling Results In the present case, model simulations have been carried out for Winter season. The maximum incremental short-term 24 hourly GLCs for NO2, likely to be encountered during

Winter season for normal operation of Flare stack and Gas Engine is 1.015 g/m3

in South West Direction.

The maximum incremental short-term 24 hourly GLCs for NO2, SO2, likely to be encountered during Winter season for emergency operation of Flare stack and Gas Engine are 16.06

g/m3, 0.142 g/m

3 respectively in South West Direction.

o Resultant Concentrations after Implementation of the Project

The maximum incremental GLCs due to the proposed project for NO2, SO2 are superimposed on the maximum baseline concentration of NO2, SO2 concentrations recorded during the study period to arrive at the likely resultant concentrations during the same period after implementation of the proposed project and are tabulated in Table 61 and 62.

TABLE 61 PREDICTED INCREMENTAL GLCS

Scenario No NO2 g/m3 SO2 g/m

3

SC-I (Flare Stack Normal Operation & Gas Engine) 1.015 -

SC-II (Flare Stack Emergency Operation & Gas Engine) 16.06 0.142

1.4 km, SW

TABLE 62 RESULTANT INCREMENTAL GLCS

Scenario Baseline Incremental GLC Resultant GLC

NO2 g/m3 SO2 g/m

3 NO2 g/m

3 SO2 g/m

3 NO2 g/m

3 SO2 g/m

3

Normal Operation

12.0 10.8 1.015 - 13.015 10.8

Emergency Operation

12.0 10.8 16.06 0.142 28.06 10.942

Perusal of above Table shows that the maximum resultant concentrations are well within the NAAQ Standards. Thus, the normal operation of Flare Stack or Gas Engine at EPS sites shall not have any adverse impact on the environment and the same can be mitigated by following suggested mitigation measures.

4.6.3 Proposed Mitigation Measures Technology considerations Condensate recovery: Check the condensable hydrocarbons (HC) percent in the flare gas. If the flare gas has high content of condensable hydrocarbons at the flare conditions, this liquid fraction should be recovered enabling the facility to spike them back into the main oil export stream. Gas recovery from atmospheric separators or tanks: Install flare gas recovery system for recovering gas routed to the flare from tanks and process separators. The gas can be routed back to the process. When flare gas recovery evaluations are made, safety, environmental, technical and economic aspects should be included in the evaluation. Even where small volumes of gas from atmospheric separators are concerned, this gas should be recompressed and used as additional gas lift, injection gas or fuel gas instead of sent to



110

flare. Note that this flare reduction technique involves the installation of compression equipment. Gas recovery/transfer as a multiphase stream: Transfer gas from satellite wells to the main facility by transforming an oil-water pipe into a gas-liquid pipe (e.g. use a multiphase pump that would require less space than a compressor). Gas re-injection or enhanced oil recovery: In some cases, flaring can be avoided by re-injecting the gas downhole. Gas injector wells can be drilled as new wells. However, it may also be possible to transform an existing producer or water injector into a gas injector via well works (re-perforations, etc.). If it is not possible to use gas re-injection for enhanced oil recovery, an option that should be evaluated is the injection of the gas into another non-producing reservoir/geological formation. Gas recovery using an internal combustion (IC) engine: For operations where a gas turbine cannot be installed, an associated gas engine can provide power for compression. Gas engines have high energy efficiency (40%) and when coupled with a reciprocating compressor, they can be adapted to a low flow volume and high compression ratio. IC engines are heavier than turbines for an equivalent power generated, and maintenance and vibration aspects can be an issue. Fuel gas conditioning might also be required for an IC engine. Gas recovery via a gas ejector: Install a gas ejector to recover the energy from a high pressure well to recompress low pressure gas instead of flaring it. Ejectors can also be used to recover gas from storage tanks (vent reduction application). (See the template for Ejectors.) Gas recovery in a vapour recovery unit: Recover LP/LLP gas or flare gas/blanket gas from oil storage tanks into a flare gas recovery unit. (See the template for VOC recovery systems.) Gas recovery in vapour recovery compressors: Install vapour recovery compressors to capture vented or flared gas, or route the gas stream into the suction of an existing compressor. Dehydrator flash gas recovery: During dehydration by absorption in the glycol contactor, methane and other hydrocarbons are also absorbed. In the flash drum and the reboiler, part of the hydrocarbons are flashed and vented to atmosphere or flared. Furthermore, the stripping gas can also be sent to flare. To recover the gas, redirect the dehydration skid flash drum vapours/overhead drum gas to the reboiler fuel gas supply, either directly to a dedicated burner or mixed with the rest of the fuel gas. Recovered gas can be also routed to other LP fuel gas consumers such as an amine reboiler, gas motors and crude heating. Also, the stripping gas consumed in the glycol regenerator can be optimized to reduce the stripping gas consumption of the glycol unit but still maintain the dew point specification. Optimization needs to be carried out with care due to, e.g. hydrate risk, off-spec gas.

4.7 Noise Environment EPS facility will generate noise during all phases of development including the pre-commissioning stage, construction activities, EPS Operation, maintenance, decommissioning and road transportation. However, the noise generation at various stages shall be for intermittent duration and major activity of operation has been considered for



111

prediction of noise impacts. For computing the noise levels at various distances with respect to the project site, noise levels are predicted using a user-friendly model.

4.7.1 Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation During Operation

For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient from the source point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is used. The sound pressure level generated by noise sources decreases with increasing distance from the source due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected due to atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path. For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different sources using model based on first principles, as per the following equation:

)r

r(LogLL1

21p2p (1)

Where Lp2 and Lp1 area Sound Pressure Levels (SPLs) at points located at distances r2 and r1 from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then can be determined at various locations by the following equation.

.........)101010(Log10L)10/3pL()10/2pL()10/1pL(

)Total(p (2)

Where, Lp1, Lp2, Lp3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources.

Based on the above equations a user-friendly model has been taken. The details of the

model are as follows:

Maximum number of sources is limited to 200;

Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source;

Model is designed to take flat terrain;

Coordinates of the sources in meters;

Maximum and Minimum levels are calculated by the model;

Output of the model in the form of isopleths; and

Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the measured Leq levels.

4.7.2 Input for the Model

The prediction of incremental noise levels due to the operation phase of the proposed EPS has been carried out using mathematical model. Identifying sources of noise Major noise sources as cumulative noise source has been identified. The input to the model has been taken as the cumulative noise of all noise-generating sources. During operations, the main sources of noise and vibration pollution are likely to emanate from flaring and operating equipment. Noise sources include flares, vents, pumps, compressors, generators, and heaters. As the project will have continuous operation, variations are experienced in the noise quality with duration and impact is experienced by the communities residing in close vicinity. The expected noise levels from various operations are provided in Table 63.



112

TABLE 63: EXPECTED SOURCES OF NOISE

S. No Noise Generating Component Noise Level Range [dB(A)]

1 Vehicular movement 60-65

2 Office & Stores 55-60

3 Pumps & Compressors 70-75

4 Flares & Vents 85-100

5 Ground Service Vehicles 70-75

6 Gas Engines 75-90

Noise due to vehicular transportation of vehicles and heavy equipment, viz., equipment transport outside the EPS site premises will be of intermittent nature and well mitigated and has not be considered for noise level predictions.

4.7.3 Results & Discussion

The ambient noise levels in the study area are determined by community sources in residential areas and localized traffic. In general the ambient noise levels in the settlement areas were what could be expected for rural residential areas during the day and night. No other sensitive receptors have been identified in near vicinity of 1 km from the project site. However, the silence zone areas around hospitals, educational institutions, courts, religious places, etc. do exist in the study area. Presently, there are no other industrial noise sources in vicinity of EPS site. The general community in the study area is predominantly rural.

It is observed that high noise levels will be conformed to work zone areas only. It can be seen that noise levels get diffused rapidly with distance. The ambient noise levels recorded in the study area are found to range between 39.7 to 50.0 dB (A) during day-time and 32.7 to 37.8 dB (A) during night-time respectively. Considering the noise level predictions in the EPS, the predicted noise levels indicate that the noise contours of less than 30 dB(A) occurs at 1 km distance from EPS. The predicted maximum noise levels are lesser than or equal to the monitored ambient baseline noise levels during day time. However, there will be substantial increase in ambient noise levels during night time. Scheduling deliveries to daytime as much as possible would minimize noise generation by vehicular/heavy equipment movement. Compressors, pumps, vehicles and miscellaneous equipment’s during EPS operation, will generate noise. However, proper acoustic enclosures would be provided to control the noise level within 85dB, as per the requirement of Operational and Safety and Health Administration Standard (OSHA).

Work Zone Noise Levels The damage risk criteria as enforced by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) to reduce hearing loss, stipulates that noise level up to 90 dB (A) are acceptable for 8 hour working shift per day. It was observed from the modeling results that high noise levels ranging between 45-65 dB(A) are limited to work zone only. At the EPS site boundary, noise levels will be varying between 45.0 dB(A) to 50.0 dB(A). Adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear plugs and noise insulated units at site will be provided to the workers working in high noise areas. All the necessary noise protective equipment will be supplied to workmen operating near high noise generating sources. In addition, reduction in noise levels in the high noise machinery areas could be achieved by adoption of suitable preventive measures such as suitable building layout in which the equipment are to be located.



113

Community Noise Levels Day and night sound pressure levels Ldn is often used to describe the community noise exposure, which includes 10 dB(A) night time penalty. The predicted incremental noise levels at a distance of 100 to 300 m from the EPS boundary would be less than <30.0 dB(A). Most of the human settlements are at a distance of 0.1 km from the proposed EPS layout boundary, except for a few. Mitigation Measures

Well-designed facility siting will be ensured

Adequate engineering control during equipment installation stage will be ensured. Noise levels will be checked by providing engineered sound barriers, and sound insulation on various units

Proper acoustic enclosures would be provided to control the noise level within 85dB, as per the requirement of OSHA.

Adoption of sound-absorbing materials will be ensured to minimize noise and vibration from the various units.

All workers and visitors will be provided Personnel Protective Equipment’s (PPE) like ear plugs and ear muffs

Gas Engines will be provided with enclosures, mufflers and regular maintenance will be ensures as per standard operating procedures.

Proper and timely maintenance of machineries and preventive maintenance of vehicles is to be adopted to reduce noise levels.

It will be ensured to execute all noise generating operations during day-time only.

4.7.4 Summary & Conclusion In summary, it can be stated that the impact on the ambient noise levels due to proposed EPS will be restricted with proper siting of units, engineered sound barriers, PPE and sound insulation on various units, the impact will be mitigated at site.

4.8 Water Environment The water requirement in EPS is mainly meant for washings and domestic use. The water requirement for domestic and wash use is very less. In the present project proposal, the daily water consumption will be around 20 m3/d of which 5 m3/d will be used for domestic purposes including drinking. Produced water will be treated at Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms. Proper bunds will be provided around all chemical and fuel storage areas, to prevent contaminated run-off to mix with storm-water drainage system. Adequate storm water management will be ensured at site and process wastewater will not be mixed in storm water.

4.8.1 Source for Groundwater Pollution:

Groundwater pollution from oil & gas production is typically point-source pollution, which

means that it is typically limited to identifiable number of sites with high concentrations of

the contaminant; nonetheless, the impact of each individual incident may be very different



114

depending on the hydrogeological conditions and the contaminant mix. Point source

pollution form oil & gas production form Collapse of well hole, wellbore fluids lost to water

bearing formation, casing rupture & well blow out. Shallow aquifers are particularly

vulnerable to contamination, since there is only a thin layer of sediment to protect the

groundwater body which is few meters below the surface. As a consequence, emissions on

the surface are more easily transported to the groundwater; on the other hand, a larger

share of the contaminated groundwater feeds to surface waters. While this raises the

probability of adverse effects on dependent ecosystems, it means that contamination

episodes in shallow aquifers are likely to be more short lived than in deep aquifers where

there is less exchange with surface water bodies.

In coastal areas, aquifers are frequently threatened by sea water intrusions into the aquifer;

this problem is referred to as saline intrusion. It is an example of the interconnectedness of

qualitative and quantitative aspects of groundwater protection. Coastal areas are over-

exploited is there a chance for saltwater to intrude into the unsaturated zone. In some parts

of study area saline intrusion is one of the main causes for groundwater quality degradation

in coastal areas. One peculiarity of saline intrusion is that the quality degradation is not due

to man-made pollution. Several sources of wastes are generated during operations and

may require storage at the site for subsequent disposal.

4.8.2 Aquifer Protection Measures

Abstractions of groundwater must be limited.

During the oil & gas production some common accidents anticipated that will be source of

groundwater pollution. Preventive or corrective methods during accidents are given in

below Table 64.

TABLE 64 : ACCIDENTS IMPACTING GROUNDWATER & PREVENTIVE METHODS

Accident Impact on Groundwater Preventive or Corrective action

Collapse of

well hole

If collapse is in water bearing

formation.

Cementing of casing will seal off

affected area.

Wellbore

fluids last to

water bearing

formation

Introduction of fluids into aquifer.

Possible salt, chemical or heavy

metal pollution to an otherwise

useful water source.

Add ”lost circulation” controlling

material (e.g. walnut hulls,

sawdust, chopped cellulose,

ground mica, etc.,) most of such

additives will remain in the

formation. Cementing of casing

will seal off affected area.

Casing

rupture

If rupture is opposite a water bearing

formation and if cementing ruptures

also, formation fluids will enter

aquifer if pressure is greater than

artesian pressure in aquifer.

Pollution may occur if direct contact

in strata occurs or infiltration from

surface if rupture causes a surface

Proper management of well and

pressurization during hydrostatic

fracturing should minimize

potential for casing ruptures.

Following an occurrence the

casing must be repaired or

replaced, if possible.



115

Accident Impact on Groundwater Preventive or Corrective action

spill.

Equipment

structural

failure and

spills

Leakage of hydrocarbons or other

contaminates, onto soils and

percolation into the shallow aquifer

system.

Frequent inspections of

equipment, replacement of worn

or fatigued parts. Immediate

clean-up of any spills.

4.9 Waste Generation

Major sources of solid waste at the proposed EPS will be construction waste, waste oil and other domestic waste. Construction waste will be disposed off with the dealers. Domestic waste will be disposed off through municipality. Oily waste which is hazardous is listed in Table 65.

TABLE 65 : OILY (HYDROCARBON) WASTE

Description Source Hazardous characteristics

Basel Convention

Classification

Alternative Recycling,

Treatment & Disposal

Technologies

Crude Oil Desalter Sludge

Process High salt and petroleum hydrocarbons, PAHs Flammable? Corrosive?

Y9; A4060 Waste Oils/water, Hydrocarbons/water mixtures, emulsions.

Thermal treatment

Treat, contain and disposal to landfill

Oily Water Oily water drains from Processing area

Process oily water

Petroleum Hydrocarbons, PAHs

Oil separators for recovery of oil

Oil returned to process or use as HFO

Oily Sand/Scale and Sludge

Oily water drains

Oil Separators

Pipelines Storage

tanks

Petroleum Hydrocarbons, PAHs

Thermal treatment,

Composting Treat,

contain and disposal to landfill

Drilling Fluids and Cuttings

Well drilling and deepening

Hitch salt and petroleum hydrocarbons, PAHs, bentonite clay, water, barium sulphate and specialized additives.

Thermal treatment,

Treat, contain and disposal to landfill

Hydraulic Oil and Pipes

Mechanical Workshops

Petroleum Hydrocarbons,

Recover oil for fuel



116

Description Source Hazardous characteristics

Basel Convention

Classification

Alternative Recycling,

Treatment & Disposal

Technologies

Heavy metals Dispose pipes to landfill

Lubricating Oil Mechanical Workshops

Petroleum Hydrocarbons, Heavy metals compounds present as additives, e.g. Zn, Mo, etc.

Recover oil and use as HFO, or

External recycling company

Grease Mechanical Workshops

Can contain Heavy metals and Antimony as additives

Recover where possible and include in used oil/HFO

Thermal treatment

Compost Dispose to

landfill

Cutting oil Mechanical Workshops

Petroleum Hydrocarbons, heavy metal compounds present as additives.

Recycle as fuel

Thermal treatment of solid reidues

Contaminated rags

Mechanical Workshops

Petroleum Hydrocarbons, degreasers

Thermal treatment

Composting Dispose to

landfill

Oil Contaminated Soil/Adsorbents

Mechanical workshops

Product collection areas

Refueling areas

Petroleum Hydrocarbons, degreasers

Thermal treatment

Composting Dispose to

landfill

Oil Filters Mechanical Workshops

Petroleum hydrocarbons, degreasers

Recover oil and recycle metal components

Mitigation Measures

Clearing of vegetation is not applicable as the site is already under the possesion of ONGC and is already brought into Industrial use due to the existing well.



117

Construction & Demolition (C&D) waste generation during the construction phase requires proper disposal.

Spillages, if any; Waste oil generation can contaminate soil if not treated and disposed properly

Domestic waste can contaminate soil, release air emissions and odour, create public nuisance and cause various diseases, if not contained and managed well

Hazardous waste generation shall be restricted to EPS site only.

Generation of Waste oil/ Used oil in very negligible quantity and shall be used for internal purpose for Oil / greasing whereas Oily cotton waste will be sent to approved TSDF site.

Oil sludge generated will be sent to authorized recyclers.

Hazardous Waste storage shall be properly designated and concreted.

Domestic Solid waste generated at site will be segregated at source (Organic / inorganic) & disposed accordingly.

General wastes, scrap metal and wood will be segregated and will be disposed off appropriately to authorized recyclers.

All plastic/paper waste will be collected and will be disposed off to scrap dealers.

Waste lubricants and hydraulic oil generated from the equipment will be disposed off to authorized waste recyclers.

Containers of oil and other materials will be sold to APPCB/CPCB authorized recyclers.

Oily cotton waste shall be segregated at source and shall be sent to authorized incinerator for disposal.

Proper provision of storage area and disposal method for solid and hazardous waste

Provision of concrete pit for storage of waste (produced) water

4.10 Socio-economic Environment – Impacts and Mitigation Measures Need base assessment of the villages The objective of the need base assessment was to know views on the project activities and expectation of the community residing in the study area from the project authority. A structured questionnaire was used for the community consultation survey in the study area. Data collected for education, drinking water, health, communication, power, market facilities etc. In addition, consultations were held with the Sarpanch, school teachers and village elders to get an idea about the social structure of the village, immediate infrastructural needs of the village and type of support required from the project proponent to improve the living standards of the village community and cope with the changes that are associated with industrialization. Collected data interpreted and analysed to know the needs of the villagers. Main issues of the study area were found drinking water problem in summer season, sanitation, no proper medical facility in villages, lack of employment opportunities etc. Based on the survey findings, it was observed that sanitation, drainage, health facilities, were lacking in villages. Development in those field is needed for the development of the villages. Impact assessment The proposed EPS can bring impacts on the community residing near. Impacts can be positive in terms of employment and living standards or negative for resource utilisation,



118

pollution etc based on the activities of EPS. It is very important to assess the impact due to the project activities. Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The project impacts are positive due to employment generation, development in

infrastructural facilities etc. Negative impacts are negligible. Employment generation in the

field of (skilled, semi-skilled and un - skilled workers) for EPS, land clearing and other

works will provide employment opportunities in surrounding villages.

Transportation activities will be increased. It may be possible that due to use of different

types of vehicles in the project site may get disturbance to village roads and villagers.

During foundation & Operation phase of EPS, dust generation may affect nearby

agricultural area to some extent.

ONGC management will take efforts as a part of CSR for improvement in civic amenities

like sanitation, drinking water facilities, transport road, etc. in the nearby villages.

Employment opportunities to local work force

Appoint trained driver for the transportation purpose, use of well-maintained

vehicles, proper sign, symbol boards for drivers

4.11 Biological Impact Assessment Methodology

Impacts on biological components were identified by following various steps as explained in following different sections. All biological impacts have been assessed considering that, all operational / engineering control suggested in EMP will be properly implemented.

4.11.1 Identification of Extent of Likely Impact Zone (LIZ) Area Extent of LIZ area can be mapped through superimposing air pollution dispersion model, noise dispersion model, drainage pattern on the project study area (Core Zone + Buffer Zone) map (toposheet or LULC map). Sometimes, in absence or unavailability of above said details, extent of LIZ area can be considered around the project boundary as suggested by EIA coordinator.

4.11.2 Identification of Likely Impacts Likely impacts on the biological components have been identified on the basis of activities and associated aspects involved in the different phases of project cycle and various ecosystems or habitats falling in the identified LIZ area.

4.11.3 Scoring of Biological Consequences The consequences due to impacts on various biological components have been categorized into 5 levels ranging from insignificant to severe consequence and are given in the following Table 66. It consists of flora, fauna and habitat / ecosystem level impacts.

TABLE 66: BIOLOGICAL CONSEQUENCES SCORING SCHEME

Consequences Score (CS)

Likely Impact Receiving Components (Ecosystem, habitat and Species Level)

Insignificant Site specific clearing (removal) of common flora i.e. herbs, shrubs,



119

Consequences Score (CS)

Likely Impact Receiving Components (Ecosystem, habitat and Species Level)

Consequence - 1 Score

grasses, climbers.

Vegetation composition does not form a habitat character for any species of conservation significance.

No short term or long term impacts are likely to adversely affect the surrounding habitat / ecosystem.

Site specific disturbance to common / generalist faunal species (e.g. movement pattern, displacement etc.).

No negative impacts on surrounding ecosystem functioning or habitat ecology.

Minor Consequence - 2 Score

Site specific loss (removal) of some common species of regenerating tree saplings.

Minor temporary impacts on ecosystem functioning or habitat ecology of common / generalist species.

Minor short term / long term impacts on surrounding / immediate / adjacent habitats but are resilient to changes in habitat structure or condition.

Impact on surrounding agro-ecosystem / agriculture when environmental data / parameters are within permissible limits.

Moderate Consequence - 3 Score

Site specific clearing (removal) of some common well grown tree / trees

Site specific loss of nesting / breeding habitat of common / generalist species of flora-fauna but will not result in permanent loss of habitat.

Short term or long term impacts having potential to affect adversely the surrounding habitat character/ habitat ecology/ functioning of ecosystem.

Impact on surrounding agro-ecosystem / agriculture when physical parameters with marginal increase but can be mitigated. Or likely cumulative impact.

Major Consequence - 4 points

Site specific impact on threatened species but impacted species is widely distributed outside the project site. Short term impacts may lead to loss of abundance or extent, but unlikely to cause local population extinction.

Site specific habitat loss of fauna listed in IUCN, WCMC, Birdlife International, or any other international literature - secondary information.

Impacts on habitats / ecosystems of international importance.

Severe Consequence - 5 points

Impact on Notified areas / species having legal protection under various acts / notifications including proposed areas / species or under consideration. Species mentioned in BSI, Red Data Book, ZSI, or literature published by any State Govt. Institute, University or Collage etc.

4.11.4 Quantifying the Probability of Occurrence of the Impact After identifying the consequence severity, the possibility of occurrence also needs to be estimated to visualize entire scenario of biological impact. Following Table 67 provides probability / likelihood ratings on a scale of 1 to 5. These ratings are used for estimating the likelihood of each occurrence.



120

TABLE 67: OCCURRENCE FREQUENCY ASSESSMENT

Description Occurrence Frequency Occurrence Frequency

Score (OFS)

Regular Definite / Constant / continuous event / each day 5

Frequent happen several times each year 4

Periodic May happen a few times each year 3

Occasional May happen few times during the project life cycle 2

Rare One time project activity (with reversible / short term impact) / Rare event during the project life cycle or accidental / unintentional event

1

4.11.5 Quantifying Biological Impact Biological Impact Score (BIS) is calculated by multiplying the Consequence Score (CS) and the Occurrence Frequency Score (OFS) together. As a result, {BIS = CS × OFS}. The final score is in relative point score, rather than actual impact. The impact evaluation is carried out assuming an implementation of sound management programmes to maintain healthy biological environment conditions. Also, helps to frame mitigation measures for reducing the ecological impact and thereafter, formulate effective Environmental Management Plans (EMPs).

4.11.6 Categorization of Intensity of Biological Impact Biological impacts are categorized in to five levels from Insignificant to Extremely Severe. Each level of impact needs different action to manage / control / supervise it in proper way. Details are tabulated in the following Table 68.

Table 68: Categorization of Biological Impacts

Score Biological

Impact Necessary Action

> 20 Extremely Severe

Proposed project activity should not proceed in current form unless clearance / approval / NOC (other than EC) from competent authorities (e.g. forest clearance / wildlife clearance etc.).

11 to 20

Moderate Severe

Operation subject to management by operational controls. Proposed activity should be operated subject to strong management and strong operational controls / or modification.

1 to 10 Less Severe

No immediate action required unless escalation of risk is possible. Operation subject to periodic monitoring / surveillance / observation.

4.11.7 Likely Impacts on Biological Environment

4.11.7.1. Identification of Extent of Likely Impact Zone (LIZ) Area An area of 500 m. around the project site has been considered as a LIZ area to identify impacting biological components. Accordingly, LIZ area includes agriculture and aquaculture ponds.



121

4.11.7.2. Identification of Likely Impacts Following impacts have been determined on the basis of the various project activities, associated aspects involved in various stages of the project cycle, and ecological setting / condition of the LIZ area. Details are given in the following Table 69.

TABLE 69: LIKELY IMPACTS ON BIOLOGICAL COMPONENTS

S. No. Proposed Project Activities

Aspects Likely Impacts

1. Pre Commissioning Phage

1 Minor clearing of site

Uprooting of vegetation / generation of noise

1. Loss of floral and associated faunal diversity

2. Disturbance to the faunal movement (terrestrial biodiversity).

2. Construction / Establishment Phage

2 Installation associated activities at site.

Generation of noise

3. Disturbance to normal faunal movement (terrestrial biodiversity).

3

Emission from operation of Gas Engine, movement of construction equipment and vehicular movement etc.

Particulate Matter (PM), oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Sulphur dioxide (SO2) and Carbon monoxide (CO).

4. Impact on surrounding habitats due to gaseous emissions.


4 Operation of power source and generator facilities – Gas Engine (in EPS).

Emission of PM, SO2, NOx

5. Impact of surrounding agriculture / vegetation due to emission of PM, SO2 and NOx and disturbance to normal faunal movements in surrounding habitats.

5 Flaring (in EPS) Generation of heat and Emission of NOx

6. Impact on surrounding vegetation due to generation of heat and NOx during Flaring.

6 Storage and handling of crude oil (in EPS)

Spillage or leak of crude oil

7. Contamination of water, habitat and soil.

4. Decommissioning

7 Leaving / deserting / dumping of waste materials

Pollutant substances (i.e. Burnt oil, Lead Acid Batteries, Oil Filters)

8. Contamination of habitat and soil.

4.11.7.3. Quantifying Biological Impact

Impacts on the flora, fauna and habitats have assessed in the following Table 70 on the basis of multiplication of Consequence Score (CS) and the Occurrence Frequency Score (OFS) together.



122

TABLE 70: BIOLOGICAL IMPACT SCORING

S. No.

Likely Impact Description Impact Scoring

Remarks CS OFS BIS


1 Loss of floral diversity: Because of existing company site no extensive site clearing will be required. No tree cutting.

1 5 5 Less Severe

2

Disturbance to the fauna / faunal movement: Common faunal species expected well adapted to the routine activities. So there they may not face significant adverse impact.

1 5 5 Less Severe


3

Disturbance to the fauna / faunal movement: Common faunal species expected well adapted to the routine activities. So there they may not face significant adverse impact.

1 5 5 Less Severe

4

Impact on surrounding habitats due to gaseous emissions: Emissions expected from operation of Gas Engines, movement of various equipment and vehicle movement etc. Since the resultant PM, SO2 and NO2 levels in the study area will be kept within the prescribed statutory limits through various engineering operational control, so no major deleterious impacts on the air environment from the project are expected.

1 5 5 Less Severe

3. Operation and Maintenance Phase

5

Impact of surrounding agriculture / vegetation due to emission of PM, SO2 and NO2 and disturbance to normal faunal movements in surrounding habitats: as described in impact 4 as above.

1 5 5 Less Severe

6

Impact on surrounding vegetation due to generation of heat and NO2 during Flaring: Flaring will be at EPS site only and it’s not a usual activity.

1 5 5 Less Severe

7

Contamination of water, habitat and soil is expected due Spillage or leak of crude oil. However, due to operational control consequences expected will be rare.

1 5 5 Less Severe

4. Decommissioning

8

Contamination of habitat and soil is expected due to Leaving / deserting / dumping of waste materials. However, due to operational control consequences expected will be rare.

1 5 5 Less Severe

4.11.7.4. Mitigation Measures

Considering above various impacts, apart from various operational / engineering controls following mitigation measures will be implemented to improve / maintain biological conditions of the project area environ. Detail description is given in the following Table 71.



123

Table 71: Likely Impacts and Suggested Mitigation Measures

Impact S. No.

Likely Impact Description Impact Justification and Mitigation Measures


1&2

Loss of floral diversity associated faunal diversity

No immediate action is required since no extensive vegetation clearance is required. However, greenbelt will be developed with suitable species as following CPCB guidelines. This greenbelt will serve as a barrier to mitigate minor impact and; to enhance habitat status & ecological conditions of the area.


3 Disturbance to normal faunal movement (terrestrial biodiversity).

No immediate action is required. However, all project related activities should be carried out day time only.

4 Impact on surrounding habitats due to gaseous emissions.

However, all vehicles and earth moving equipment should be PUC certified. Appropriate measures should be taken for dust suppression. However, thick greenbelt development has been suggested to mitigate this impact and enhance habitat status of the project area. All operational control should be implemented.


5

Impact of surrounding agriculture / vegetation due to emission of PM, So2 and No2 from Gas Engines and disturbance to normal faunal movements in surrounding habitats.

Greenbelt development has been suggested to avoid impacts on the surrounding habitats.

6

Impact on surrounding vegetation due to generation of heat and NO2 during Flaring.

Greenbelt development has been suggested to avoid impacts on the surrounding habitats.

7 Contamination of water, habitat and soil due to spillage or leak of crude oil

Requires operational control

4. Decommissioning

8

Contamination of habitat and soil due to pollutant substances (i.e. Burnt oil, Lead Acid Batteries, Oil Filters)

Requires operational / engineering control.

4.12 Summary of Identified Impacts and Proposed Mitigation Measures

TABLE 72 : CONSOLIDATED IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES FOR EPS

S.No Impacts Mitigation Measures

1 Air Emissions

Emissions from Gas Engines

Flaring of

A flare stack of 30 m height shall be provided at existing EPS.

Gas produced shall be supplied to nearby industries and flaring shall be restricted to technical flaring only.



124


associated gas

Emissions from vehicular movement;

Fugitive emissions may result from handling and storage of hydrocarbons (crude & diesels) which are very minor.

At the time of transportation dust will be generated.

Water spraying to be done on the access roads to control re-entrained dust during dry season(if required);

The engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipment used will be maintained as such, that exhaust emissions are low and do not breach statutory limits set for the concerned vehicle/equipment type;

Ensuring the availability of valid Pollution Under Control Certificates (PUCC) for all vehicles

2 Noise Generation

Noise from Production Operation

Noise from vehicular Traffic / movement

Noise from Gas engine

Sufficient engineering control during installation of equipment’s and machineries is to be ensured to reduce noise levels at source;

Proper and timely maintenance of vehicles is to be adopted to reduce noise levels;

All noise generating operations, (except anything directly related to Production operations) to be restricted to daytime only to the extent possible;

Personal Protective Equipment’s (PPE) like ear plugs/muffs is to be provided to all the workers at site and it shall be ensured that the same are worn by everyone during their shift.

3 Wastewater Generation Produced water storage and loading bay facilities to transfer produced water to Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms.

Waste water generation will be from domestic usage and produced water.

All chemical and fuel storage areas shall have proper bunds so that contaminated run-off cannot meet the storm-water drainage system;

Company shall strive continually on Reduce, Recycle, and Fuel and Crude oil shall be stored in Reuse principle.

Chemical shall be stored in proper packing under shed, Spill control mechanism

4 Land On completion of works (installation of additional Tanks, Separators etc) at EPS site, surplus materials and wastes will be completely removed;

Optimization of land requirement through proper site lay out design

5 Soil Management of spillage of contaminants such as oil from equipment’s, etc. on the Soil;

Chemicals to be stored at concrete paved designated area, with roofs

Proper arrangement of soak pits to be provided at the production site for disposal of domestic waste water;

Hazardous waste generated at site shall be segregated



125


at source based on the categories and stored on concrete paved designated area with roofs.

6 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management













7 Socio Economic Generation of indirect employment in the region due to the requirement of workers, supply of raw material, auxiliary and ancillary works, which would marginally improve the economic status of the people.

Result in an increase in local skill levels through exposure to activities.

As the existing loose / soft surface roads, shall be upgraded to facilitate the movement of the heavy equipment required, the project in turn would lead to improvement in transport facilities.

CSR activities shall be carried out by ONGC, under the directive of Government of Andhra Pradesh which shall help in improvement of facilities in the area.

8 Flora and Fauna Impact on terrestrial fauna due to noise

Project infrastructure will disturb agriculture land of site

Flaring (if required) shall be restricted to technical flaring and shall be done as per OMR 1984 standard to minimize effect on avifauna.

Acoustic enclosure shall be provided to Gas Engines to reduce the noise intensity

Development of plantation of native species to



126


Spillage, leakage may produce chemical spillage which will disrupt agriculture of nearby farm

Production activity ( tanker movement) may increase deposition of dust and dust settling on the vegetation which may alter or limit plants' abilities to photosynthesize and/or reproduce

substitute the access cutting, site preparation, which shall provide habitat, food and breeding areas to birds, small animals and insects

Use existing facilities (e.g. Access Roads) to the extent possible to minimize the amount of new disturbance

Avoid use of unnecessary lighting at night to avoid attracting avifauna

Site clearing is not there as the EPS area is already under the possesion of ONGC and well BTSAD is available.

9 Occupational Health and risk to surrounding community

Noise generated during operational activity may affect the workers and staff members.

Handling of chemicals, fuel, may cause health hazard if not handled properly.

Injuries including fatality of workers as well as damage to surrounding communities.

Providing PPE to site workers and staff member or ensuring it through contractors.

Acoustic enclosures will be provided to Gas Engines and other noise generating equipment.

ONGC will develop and implement a spill management plan to prevent risk of spill which may cause health problem.

All operational activities shall be carried out in confirmation with applicable OISD standards/ regulations/ guidelines.

Regular internal / external HSE inspection shall be carried out.

Community awareness with regards to Operation activities and Risk and Hazards associated with the same shall be carried out.

10 Chemical, Fuel & Crude Storage

Fuel and Crude oil will be stored in tanks which has provision of bund,

Chemical will be stored in proper packing under shed

Spill control mechanism


Chapter 5 : Analysis of Alternatives

127

5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1 Alternate Location for the Proposed Project

No alternative site is applicable for this project, as there are existing wells nearer to the site. The proposed project is for the development of the block. The proposed EPS will be set up within BTSAD well Location to eliminate the foot prints


Chapter 6 : Environmental Monitoring Program

128

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.1 Introduction

All the environmental parameters viz. air, water, noise, soil, etc are being monitored regularly in order to detect any changes from the baseline status. Monitoring program is being carried out regularly every year as per the schedule given below

6.2 Air Quality Monitoring Four locations in core zone and four locations in the buffer zone will be monitored on twenty four hourly basis for two days in a week, twelve weeks in every season except monsoon

6.3 Noise Level Monitoring Noise levels in the working area will be monitored once in every season till the continuation of operations. Ambient noise levels will also be monitored once in a season in the buffer zone order to get the overall look of the noise status and its effects on the surrounding community.

6.4 Water Quality Monitoring Water quality will be monitored in every season. The concentration of heavy metals will be checked for likely contamination. Samples will also be collected from available surface water. Ground water quality will also be monitored in order to know the impacts of project operations. This data will be compared to baseline to evaluate the efficacy of the adopted mitigation measures and if further corrective measures are needed. Water levels are also being monitored on seasonal basis in surrounding wells, to assess the impact on ground water regime quantitatively.

6.5 Water Quality Monitoring Soil samples will be collected from the study area in the areas and quality will be checked once every season except monsoon in order to observe any deviations in the impacts of the operations and the corresponding improvement in the fertility of the soil. The monitoring system will also include:

TABLE 73 : SUMMARY - MONITORING PROGRAMME

S.NO. PARAMETERS SCHEDULE LOCATION

1 Air quality monitoring

24 hourly Monitoring for 12 weeks in pre, post-monsoon & winter season every year

4 in core zone 4 in buffer zone

2 Noise quality monitoring

Once in pre, post-monsoon & winter season every year

Core & Buffer zone

3 Water quality monitoring

Pre-monsoon, Monsoon, Post monsoon and winter season

Surface water bodies including seasonal streams nearby and ground water from nearby villages


Chapter 6 : Environmental Monitoring Program

129

S.NO. PARAMETERS SCHEDULE LOCATION

4 Soil quality analysis Once in a year, preferably during dry season

4 locations from the area around the core zone

5 Green belt / Plantation

Once in a year Plantation area

6 Socio Economic Developmental activities

As per need based assessment Study area

6.6 Environmental Management Cell For implementation of Environment Management Plan, an Environment Management Cell will be formed under the control of the Project Manager. The EMC will be headed by an Environmental engineer/scientist with sufficient trained manpower in his charge. The responsibilities of this cell will be:

1. Implementation of pollution control measures 2. Monitoring programme implementation 3. Post-plantation care 4. To check the efficiency of pollution control measures taken 5. Any other activity as may be related to environment 6. Seeking expert’s advice when needed 7. Submission of the various compliance reports to the statutory authorities like

SPCB/MoEF& CC, etc.

6.7 Environmental Monitoring Cost

The Monitoring Cost for one Year will be approximately 12 Lakhs per Annum (3 lakhs per season X 4 Seasons).


Chapter 7 : Additional Studies

130

7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1. Risk Assessment

Oil & Natural Gas Corporation (ONGC) Rajahmundry Asset, India, plans to establish an Early Production System (EPS) at BTSAD Bhimavaram. As part of the procedure for clearance by the MOEF&CC, ONGC need to submit a rapid risk assessment of the operations. ONGC has commissioned Bhagavathi Ana Labs Private Limited (BALPL) to conduct a rapid risk assessment of the proposed EPS and to establish the Risk Criteria and based on it provide recommendations and Mitigation measures to bring the level of risk to as low as reasonably practicable (ALARP). ONGC intends EPS with a capacity of 7LSCMD of Gas.

7.1.1. Rapid Risk Assessment Approach

Study Assumptions The quantified risk assessment (QRA) approach used in this rapid risk assessment is necessarily generic in nature as the EPS is yet to be selected. However, a credible QRA can be achieved by the careful setting of assumptions and generally by taking a conservative view of the event frequency, equipment performance and consequence modelling. This will be the approach that has been followed in this study.

The principal study assumptions regarding: lifecycle, study scope, EPS data, legislative compliance, support services, operating practices are contained in Table 72. These assumptions have been applied to all generic QRA’s. In addition, modelling assumptions specific to EPS are provided below. ALARP Risk Principles The ONGC definition of risk tolerability, against which all the QRA results have been assessed, below The definition of what level of risk is tolerable, difficult and necessarily subjective. For safety risks ONGC has adopted the ALARP principle (as low as reasonably practical) outlined in Figure 35 below.

In general terms, the risk should be considered to be ALARP if the cost of reducing the risk further cannot be justified by the reduction in risk which would occur. For many risks these ALARP considerations may be addressed qualitatively. For high risk situations numerical risk tolerability performance standards are required. If the risk is not considered to be ALARP even following the correct development and application of control measures, then alternative ways of achieving the operational objective shall be identified and considered. Figure 36 shows the methodology adopted for the rapid risk assessment of the EPS operation.

Qualitative demonstration of ALARP In relatively low risk situations when the ALARP justification is being made qualitatively some or all of the following can be applied where appropriate:

demonstration of the application of best practice including technology and management techniques,

reference to trends in accident and incident statistics, discussion /comparison of risk levels before and after possible change, i.e. identification of practicable options for reduction of risks following the preferred hierarchy as follows, elimination or minimisation of hazard, engineering design, suitable systems of working, and then personal protective equipment



131

FIGURE 35 : RAPID RISK ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY

FIGURE 36 : ALARP CRITERIA



132

Quantitative demonstration of ALARP Where the consequences of a hazard being realised are very high, i.e. where multiple fatalities, severe environmental damage or damage to installations, and/or major loss of production would result, then quantitative risk assessment (QRA) techniques must be used to demonstrate ALARP. It needs to be understood that QRA is not an exact science; it relies on the use of historical data which may be inaccurate or not directly relevant. Nevertheless, it is valuable in comparing risks to identify priorities and can be used with caution to establish absolute levels of risk. These absolute levels can then be compared with criteria which establish the way in which risks are to be treated. ONGC has determined that, on the basis of generally accepted international risk acceptance criteria:

No offshore installation shall pose an individual risk per annum (IRPA) of death to those involved in operating or maintaining the installation from major accidents greater than a 1 in 1,000 chance a year. If this risk can be shown to be less than 1 in 100,000 a year, then it will be accepted;

Where the risk lies between these levels, then potential design improvements will be assessed to ensure that risks are reduced to an ALARP level.

In other words: an IRPA greater than 1 in 1,000 a year cannot be accepted as ALARP; an IRPA less than 1 in 100,000 a year is automatically accepted; IRPA's between these levels may be accepted but additional safeguards should be examined to ensure that an ALARP level is reached.

Control Measures to Reduce Risks Once it has been decided that a risk needs further control, the means of doing so should be evaluated in the following order of preference:

Eliminate the hazard. Occasionally this may prove practicable, for example, by changing the material used, the process or the equipment. An example would be cleaning using a detergent instead of a flammable, toxic solvent;

Technical solutions. Engineered control measures, for example enclosures, ventilation systems, alarms, trips and guards. These are relatively independent of the human factor, and generally can be made reliable;

Procedural solutions. Doing things in a different way to improve safety relies on individuals complying with procedures. Training and communication are important to ensure that operators recognise the risks and know how to avoid them;

Protective equipment (PPE). This is the least satisfactory form of control, and should only be considered after all others have been rejected.

It should be noted that introducing controls can produce further risks which may need to be assessed in turn.

Risk cannot be justified save in extraordinary circumstances, Finally, each QRA requires:

The identification of major hazards specific to the unit being assessed The construction of an event tree for each major hazard to derive a set of credible sub – events Numerical values for major hazard occurrence frequencies and event probabilities are derived from international accident databases of historical incidents and are combined in the event tree to derive occurrence frequencies for these sub events. BALPL have consistently adopted a conservative modelling approach in defining these frequencies and probabilities. All such modelling assumptions are listed;

The modelling of the consequences in terms of potential fatalities from each credible sub event. As these are ’rapid’, generic risk assessments, this modelling does not take the form of detailed physical modelling but rather reflects typical



133

outcomes based on historical data. BALPL have consistently adopted a conservative approach in deriving such outcomes and all such modelling assumptions are listed

It is ONGC intention to use the latest generation of EPS for this work. Hence the use of historical records which reflect the performance of potentially lower design and operational standards, may introduce an additional element of conservatism into the approach over and above that inherent in BALPL’s selection and application of data.

TABLE 74 : PRINCIPAL STUDY ASSUMPTIONS

Assumption Number

Assumption Title

Description

1 Lifecycle

The risk analysis will assume that the EPS are securely on location and will cover a typical ‘whole lifecycle’ of the well operation including:

EPS Operation

Decommission of EPS

2 Study Scope

The QRA will address those hazards with the potential to cause a “major incident” (e.g. multiple fatalities)

The study is confined to events occurring on the EPS and the impact of any releases on the environment.

In the event of EPS removal

3 EPS Information

The EPS capacity is Gas processing of 7LSCMD

4 Site Information

BALPL identified all potential environmental sensitivities and an appropriate site survey for debris etc in earlier chapters.

5 Operator Information

Operator has and will apply modern Safety Management System

6 Acceptable Risk Levels

The individual risk per annum (IRPA) will be assessed against the ALARP risk level

7 Supporting Study Data

Industry acceptable data sources will be substantially utilised in the assessments. These include but are not limited to:

UK Health and Safety Executive (HSE) Hydrocarbon Ignition Database

Purple Book

7.1.1.1. Risk Analysis Results for EPS

Major Accident Hazards (MAH) The major hazards identified for the EPS are shown in Table 74.

TABLE 75 : MAJOR ACCIDENT HAZARDS FOR EPS

Hazard MAH Including

1 Passing Vehicle Collision

Movement of material near EPS



134

Hazard MAH Including

2 Structural Failure

It is assumed that the unit has been chosen to be fit for purpose for its area of operation and that failure occurs as a result of extreme events such as earthquakes, extreme winds etc.

3 Non Process Fires

Cellulosic or electrical fires in accommodation: Storage tanks or pipe leaks leading to fires & explosions in machinery spaces: etc.

4 Hydrocarbon Leaks

Leaks, fires and explosions

Modelling Assumptions The frequency to be assigned to the likelihood of occurrence of each major hazard is derived from industry reference sources and has been used to facilitate this frequency derivation and to support consequence modelling.

TABLE 76 : ASSUMPTIONS FOR PASSING VEHICLE COLLISION TO EPS

S.No Assumption Comments

1 Frequency of passing Vehicle collision is 0.0008 per year

As per above references

2

In 90% of such cases there is sufficient prior warning to allow for precautionary evacuation

No data has been found. This estimate is based on the assumed existence of the following controls to provide for early warning: EPS has radar which is regularly monitored, Control of Vehicle Movement

3

Of the remaining 10% of impacts, it is assumed that the following apply: 75% do not impair the

structural stability of the EPS; only 25% do

Of these 25%, one tenth also result in ignition leading to jet fires / explosion

Based on a conservative interpretation of data reference. Collision energy of 35 – 70 MJ is required for column collapse in rigs. Estimate taking account fires and explosions can occur when the EPS is in Operation (a small % - around 10% - of the time that the EPS is working) coupled with the fact that, when hydrocarbons are present controls exist to shut down flow (e.g. safety valves) these would have to be impaired

4

Ignore the possible impacts of pressure flow of gas same time as this incident occurs

Assume that the well is likely to be live (assuming that all 4 wells are operating) i.e. a probability of 0.11. Flow control with help of HP, LP Valves. Assume a typical reliability of 0.01 per demand for these 2 safety barriers.

5

When the vessels on EPS are toppled 25% of the personnel near EPS are immediate fatalities Remaining 75% escape. Probability of rescuing is 0.8

Estimate based on calculations using data from reference, assume moderate weather conditions



135

TABLE 77 : EVENT TREE FOR VEHICLE COLLISION TO EPS

Men on rig capsizes Sub Event Description Frequency per

year Probability 0.1 0.25 1 Capsizes 2 Impact 3 Collision when unoccupied

2.0E-05

6.0E-05

7.2E-04

Passing Vehicle impacts 8.E-04 per year

8.0E-05

2.0E-05

6.0E-05

7.2E-04

TABLE 78 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR VEHICLE COLLISION TO EPS

Sub Event

Frequency per year

Men in immedia

te area

Prob of immedia

te fatality

Estm. Immedia

te fatalities

Men needing escape/ evacuati

on

Means of

escape/ evacuati

on

Prob of

fatality

Estm. Escape/ evac

fatalities

Total fatalitie

s

AFR

1 Capsizes

2.0E-05 114 0.25 29 86 R 2.E-01

17 46 9.1E-04

2 Impact 6.0E-05 114 0 0 114 H 1.3E-05

1.5E-03 0 8.9E-08

3 Collision when unoccupied

7.2E-04 114 0 0 114 H 1.3E-05

1.5E-03 0 1.1E-06

TOTAL AFR : 9.1E-04 IRPA : 4.0E-06

Evacuation methods TR - muster in TR (no evacuation required) H - musters in TR and evacuation

TABLE 79 : ASSUMPTION FOR STRUCTURAL FAILURE OF EPS


1 Probability of a structural failure in any year is assumed to be 0.0028

Structural failure includes: design error, fatigue failure, modification error, operating outside design parameters (e.g. extreme weather / earthquakes in excess of design conditions). It is assumed that the EPS has been correctly specified for the anticipated environmental conditions It is assumed that only the 2 most severe categories will contribute to major structural failure. These are:

total loss of the unit severe damage to one or more modules of the unit / major damage to essential equipment

These 2 categories comprise 12.8% and 22.8% of all structural failure contributions (35.6% in total) Hence the annual EPS failure rate is 0.0077*0.36 = 0.0028.

2 90% of failures are assumed to give some warning and hence allow time for precautionary evacuation

Estimate



136


3 The remaining 10% of failures are split as follows: 10% of them result in sudden

collapse The remaining 90% are the result

of a progressive failure

Estimate

4 When escaping from the EPS sudden collapse scenario, personnel will have a 50 % survival probability

A potentially conservative interpretation which assumes that the collapse is so sudden that many escape routes become unusable

5 When escaping from the place progressive collapse scenario, personnel will have a 90 % survival probability

Based on a conservative interpretation of reference assuming that all such events will occur during severe weather. Reference gives a probability of failure to survive as 0.06.

TABLE 80 : EVENT TREE FOR STRUCTURAL FAILURE STRUCTURAL FAILURE OF EPS

Sub Event No

precautionary evacuation

Progressive failure Description Frequency

per year

Probability 0.1 0.1 1 Loss of EPS, personnel have time to evacuate 2 Catastrophic loss 3 Loss of EPS with no personnel near

2.8E-05

2.5E-04

2.5E-03

Structural failure 2.8E-03 per year

2.8E-04

2.8E-05

2.5E-04

2.5E-03

TABLE 81 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL FAILURE OF EPS

Evacuation methods TR - muster in TR (no evacuation required) H - Muster in TR and evacuation

Sub Event

Frequency per year

Men in immedia

te area

Prob of immedia

te fatality

Estm. Immedia

te fatalities


on

Means of escape/ evacuati

on

Prob of

fatality

Estm. Escape/ evac

fatalities

Total fatalitie

s AFR

1 Loss of EPS, personnel have time to evacuate

2.8E-05 114 0 0 114 H 1.3E-05

1.5E-03 0 4.1E-08

2 Catastrophic loss

2.5E-04 114 0.5 57 114 L/R 1.E-01

11.4 68 1.7E-02

3 Loss of EPS with no personnel near

2.5E-03 114 0 0 114 H 1.3E-05

1.5E-03 0 3.7E-06

TOTAL AFR IRPA

1.7E-02 7.6E-05



137

TABLE 82 : ASSUMPTIONS FOR NON PROCESS FIRES AT EPS


1 Frequency of all fires is taken as 0.021 per annum

Possible sources are spills, electrical fires, accommodation fires.

2 All (100%) of these fires are assumed to be non-process related

Conservative approach reflecting the reality that most fires will be minor and arise from non-process related causes

3 Assume that 20 % of all fires result in significant damage

Reference states that 19% of all fires are considered significant or greater. This figure is rounded up to 20% to ensure conservatism.

4

Two fatalities will occur where there is significant damage. Otherwise, no fatality will occur

Conservative approach. As these fires are not process related the available inventory to feed the fire is assumed to be limited. Hence the fire will be contained and will not be capable of impacting many people near EPS. It is also assumed that EPS firefighting capability will always be able to extinguish the fire

TABLE 83 : EVENT TREE FOR NON PROCESS FIRES AT EPS

Sub Event

Significant damages

Description Frequency per year Probability 0.2

1 Fire causing no significant damages 2 Fire resulting in no significant damages

4.2E-03 1.7E-02

Fire 2.1E-02 per year

4.2E-03

1.7E-02

TABLE 84 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR NON PROCESS FIRES OF EPS

Sub Event

Frequency per year

Men in immediate area

Prob of immedia

te fatality

Estm. Immedia

te fatalities


on

Means of escape/ evacuati

on

Prob of

fatality

Estm. Escape

/ evac

fatalities

Total fatalitie

s AFR

1 Fire causing no significant damages 2 Fire resulting in no significant damages

4.2E-03

1.7E-02

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2

0

112

114

TR

TR

0

0

0 0

2 0

8.4E-03

0.0E+00

TOTAL AFR 8.4E-03 IRPA 3.7E-05



138

Evacuation methods TR - muster in TR (no evacuation required) H - muster in TR and evacuation

TABLE 85 : ASSUMPTIONS FOR HYDROCARBON LEAKS IN EPS


1

Assume annual gas leakage frequency of 0.00027

Derived from reference assuming: Gas Processing Facilities, High Pressure low

pressure safety valves, Group Header, Test Header, Test Separator, Separation Units, Gas conditioning Units, Dew Point depression unit, N2 Removal Unit, Condensate stabilization, storage and evacuation, Off gas compressor, Gas Supply Unit, Produced water storage and evacuation, utilities for gas processing and associated pipework. This equates to pressure vessels, flanges, valves (assume inlet and outlet to isolate skid) and an assumed 40 metres of pipework

reference gives the following annual failure frequencies: pressure vessel (0.00015), valve (0.00023), flange (0.000088), piping (4” to 11” – 0.000036 per metre)

This produces an annual leak frequency of (4*0.00015)+(2*0.000088)+ (0.00023*2) +(40*0.000036) = 0.0027

This happens throughout the year 365/365 = 1 Thus annual leak frequency is 0.0027*1 =0.0027

2

Assume that 95% of leaks can be isolated

Typical value used in risk assessments. Detection can be by personnel or automatic equipment and relates to the probability of a single valve not closing. As isolation is possible via ESD valve this can be considered a conservative approach

3

If the gas release is not isolated all workers in the immediate vicinity will be assumed to be exposed

Conservative approach Assume 8 men in the immediate vicinity during EPS Operation

4

If the release is isolated no fatalities occur

If the release is isolated only a short lived jet fire or small flash fire is possible in the event of ignition or a small volume of potentially poisonous gas in the event that the gas contains H2S. In all these scenarios the threat is limited and contained and hence they do not result in any fatalities

5

Assume probability of ignition of 0.1

Reference suggests that the probability of ignition for small and large gas leaks is 0.005 and 0.3 respectively. Reference indicates that this upper value may be too conservative by recommending a probability of ignition for blowouts of 0.1. Most leaks from process equipment are small and hence a figure towards the lower end of the scale will be most appropriate. Although a lower figure may be justifiable the figure of 0.1 is considered suitably conservative

6

When ignition occurs: 50% of the time it occurs

immediately and results in a jet fire

50% of the time it will be

In the event of ignition of hydrocarbons the following may occur pool fire: a burning pool of liquid (oil) on the rig jet fire: a burning jet of gas which if ignited soon after it

occurs results in an intense stabilised jet which is



139


delayed and result in an explosion

very destructive to anything within it or close to it Flash fire: delayed (say after 15 minutes) ignition of a

gas release. In this time the release may have formed an extensive plume and the ensuing fire will kill everyone within it who is unprotected but not damage structures

Confined explosion: delayed ignition of a gas release within a confined space, the delay (usually in excess of 5 minutes) giving time for an explosive mixture to build up. It has the potential for considerable fatalities and damage. It is assumed that the necessary degree of confinement does not exist on a jack up

Vapour cloud explosion: an ignited gas plume which burns in such a way that it generates overpressures characteristic of an explosion.

A simple but conservative approach has been taken that all immediate ignition events result in a jet fire while the results of all delayed ignition events (whether they are from a flash fire or a vapour cloud explosion) are equally severe

7 No allowance is made for the EPS firefighting capability

A very conservative approach which also reflects lack of knowledge of the rigs safety equipment

8

Probability of fatalities if the gas leak is not isolated are as follows: 0% probability for un-

ignited releases if low H2S or CO2 present. Otherwise see items 9 and 10

10% for jet fires 50% for explosions

Generally reflective of a typical industry approach

9

For unignited gas releases assume a 5% probability that the reservoir contains volumes of H2S or CO2 at concentration levels high enough to cause fatalities

Estimate

10

Unignited releases if the gas contains high levels of H2S or CO2 10% probability of fatality

for all personnel near EPS as a result of H2S poisoning

0% probability of fatality for all other personnel who are assumed to follow the pre-arranged H2S drill and successfully evacuate the area

Personnel evacuating EPS

It is conservatively assumed that gas rather than oil is present in the feed. Assume that best practice H2S protection measures are adopted and regular drills held. Assume personnel near the EPS are warned of impending danger by alarms, etc. Personnel at most risk assumed to be in open areas. All personnel follow procedures but, as a result of equipment failure or lack of training only 90% success is achieved



140


Area will have escape & evacuation probability of fatalities

TABLE 86 : EVENT TREE FOR HYDROCARBON LEAKS IN EARLY PRODUCTION SYSTEM

OPERATION

Release

is isolated

Ignition Delayed ignition

High H2S or CO2

concentration

Sub Event

Description Frequency

per year

Probability 0.95 0.1 0.5 0.05 1 Small flash fire 2 Short-lived jet flame 3 Small gas cloud with high H2S or CO2 concentration 4 Small gas cloud with low H2S or CO2 concentration 5 Explosion 6 Jet flame 7 Gas cloud with high H2S or CO2 concentration 8 Gas cloud with low H2S or CO2 concentration

1.3E-04 1.3E-04 1.2E-04 2.2E-03 6.8E-06 6.8E-06 6.1E-06 1.2E-04

Hydrocarbon leak 2.7E-03 per year

2.6E-03

2.6E-04

1.3E-04

1.3E-04

2.3E-03

1.4E-04

1.2E-04

2.2E-03

1.4E-05

6.8E-06

6.8E-06

1.2E-04

6.1E-06

1.2E-04

TABLE 87 : CONSEQUENCE CALCULATIONS FOR HYDROCARBON LEAKS DURING WELL TESTING / EARLY PRODUCTION SYSTEM

Sub Event Frequency per year


Prob of immedi

ate fatality

Estm. Immedi

ate fatalitie

s


on

Means of

escape/ evacuati

on

Prob of

fatality

Estm. Escap

e/ evac

fatalities

Total fataliti

es AFR

1 Small flash fire

1.3E-04 10 0 0 114 TR 0 0 0 0.0E+00

2 Short-lived jet flame

1.3E-04 10 0 0 114 TR 0 0 0 0.0E+00

3 Small gas cloud with high H2S or CO2 concentration

1.2E-04 10 0 0 114 TR 0 0 0 0.0E+00

4 Small gas cloud

2.2E-03 10 0 0 114 TR 0 0 0 0.0E+00



141

Sub Event Frequency per year


Prob of immedi

ate fatality

Estm. Immedi

ate fatalitie

s


on

Means of

escape/ evacuati

on

Prob of

fatality

Estm. Escap

e/ evac

fatalities

Total fataliti

es AFR

with low H2S or CO2 concentration 5 Explosion

6.8E-06 10 0.5 5 109 H 1.3E-05

1.4E-03

5 3.4E-05 6 Jet

flame 6.8E-06 10 0.1 1 113 H

1.3E-05

1.5E-03

1 6.8E-

06 7 Gas cloud with high H2S or CO2 concentration

6.1E-067 10 0.1 1 113 H 1.3E-

05 1.5E-

03 1

6.1E-06

8 Gas cloud with low H2S or CO2 concentration

1.2E-04 10 0 0 114 H 1.3E-05

1.5E-03

0 1.7E-07

TOTAL AFR: 4.7E-5 IRPA : 2.1E-07 Evacuation methods TR - muster in TR (no evacuation required) H - muster in TR and evacuation

7.1.1.2. Calculation of Individual Risk Per Annum (IRPA)

Event trees and consequence analysis will be used to evaluate the Annual Fatality Rate (AFR) for each major hazard

By their method of calculation these AFR’s provide a measure of the average risk to employees. They essentially weight each groups contribution to fatalities by exposure

All major hazard AFR’s will then be summed to derive a total AFR for EPS

This figure is the average risk faced in one year by all personnel working in EPS and has been calculated assuming that the EPS always contains 8 personnel

However, workforce of 8*2 = 16 to maintain a constant 16 man workforce near EPS for the whole year.

Hence the IRPA can be simplistically assumed to be (Total AFR / 16)

7.1.1.3. Analysis Results

The results of the risk analysis for the EPS at BTSAD are shown in Table 88.

TABLE 88 : RISK RESULTS

Hazard No Major Accident Hazard Individual Risk Per Annum (IRPA)

1 Passing Vehicle collision 4.0E-06

2 Structural Failure 7.6E-05

3 Non Process Fires 3.7E-05



142

Hazard No Major Accident Hazard Individual Risk Per Annum (IRPA)

4 Hydrocarbon Leaks 2.1E-07

TOTAL 1.17E-04

7.1.1.4. Comparison with ALARP Criteria

The total individual risk (IRPA) for the EPS operation at BTSAD has been estimated to be 1.17E-04 fatalities per annum. This is within the ALARP region of less than 1.00E-03 but greater than 1.00E-05. The calculated fatality frequency for each individual hazard is also within the ALARP region with the exception of Vehicle Collision (4.0E-06) and Hydrocarbon Leaks (2.1E-07). Which are both in the ‘broadly acceptable’ region. IRPA's in the ALARP Region are tolerable but additional safeguards should be examined to ensure that an ALARP level is reached in practice and the risk further reduced using cost effective solutions.

7.1.1.5. Oil Spill Frequency

The event trees have identified a number of contributions to the release of hydrocarbons from the EPS. The safety impacts of these releases have been modelled in the consequence analyses; this section addresses their potential environmental impact taking account of the relative remoteness of Bantumilli South Field from the coastline. Hydrocarbon releases may arise from the EPS Vessels, equipment / tanks, or from the feed pipeline. The releases are categorised as follows:

Tier 1 – spills <10 tonnes: These releases are assumed to have only a small, local to the unit, impact and to be capable of being managed solely by the unit. Most spills in this category are likely to be sufficiently small to be dispersed naturally; the remainder assumed to have a limited oil spill response capability. Such incidents can arise from: spills of oils /lubricants; diesel spillages etc. Events resulting in such minor spillages are not conducive to QRA and therefore have not been modelled as part of this QRA.

TABLE 89 : INITIATING EVENTS LEADING TO TIER 1 OIL SPILL

Initiating Event (Major Accident Hazard) Hazard No Annual Frequency

Passing Vehicle collision 1 4.0E-06

Tier 2 – spills >10 to 100 tonnes: These incidents may not be capable of being managed entirely by the EPS unit and may require some limited outside support.



Structural Failure 2 7.6E-05

Tier 3 – spills >100 tonnes These incidents, resulting from hydrocarbon releases from the feed line, have the potential to impact a wider area and, particularly at the upper end of the range, to impact the coast no matter how remote from the shore the unit may be.



Hydrocarbon Leaks 4 2.1E-07

NOTES:

1: Maximum volume = Open hole flow rate x Pump Capacity



143

2: Maximum volume assumes that ESD is not working

This gives a total spill frequency for Tier 2 and Tier 3 for a EPS operation of 8.0E-05.

7.1.1.6. Recommendations

Recommendations are given in Table 92 for each of the risks within the ALARP region. Implementing these recommendations will ensure that the assumptions in the risk assessment are valid and potentially provide cost effective risk reduction measures. These constitute ‘best practice’ for operational control and would form part of an effective Safety Management System.

In addition recommendations have been made relating to preparedness for dealing with the risk of an oil spill during the EPS operation.

TABLE 92 : RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EPS

Hazard No

Hazard Recommendation

1 Passing Vehicle Collision

Ensure that there is adequate monitoring by Transporting team. Emergency exercises to include dealing with errant Vehicles

2 Structural Failure

Establishment of Certified EPS as per National Standards, International Standards and Best Management Practices

3 Non-Process Fires

Maintain awareness of crew of fire risks within accommodation and engine spaces

4

All oil spills resulting from the major hazards

The oil spill planning requires: Response capability at EPS. Some pollution control capability back-up resources identified adequate training in Emergency Response Follow OISD RP 201

Proper zoning of the area is to be done to avoid cumulative fire scenarios. MSDS should be provided in the storage areas and clear demarcation of hazards is to be provided. If the tanks / Vessels near EPS are caught with fire the heat radiation will reach a distance of 300mts which will be well within the site premises. EPS Layout Plan is provided as Figure 37.



144

FIGURE 37 : EPS LAYOUT

7.2. Emergency Response Plan 7.2.1. Objectives And Scope

The key objective of this Emergency Response Plan (ERP) is to outline the management, organisational arrangements and available facilities that will be utilised by ONGC, in the event of an emergency situation arising during the proposed activity at BTSAD. The plan identifies the philosophy and approach for managing an emergency and provides an outline of the roles and responsibilities of key ONGC and contractor staff for potential emergency scenarios identified as part of the rapid risk assessment conducted for the proposed EPS activity.

The plan should not include specific action items for controlling emergencies but provides a basis on which specific detailed emergency response procedures may be developed.

This section outlines the key elements of an Emergency Response Plan to support the EPS activity.

7.2.1.1. Emergency Response Organisation And Communication

Initial response to any incident will be managed on site. The overall level of response will depend on the nature and scale of the emergency.

Emergency incidents have the potential to impact both ONGC (staff / reputation / schedule/ etc.). Hence there should be one ERP for the EPS operation that reflect the



145

integration of both the ONGC Head Office and EPS Station. The initial response to all incidents should be managed by the EPS unit.

The specific structure and organisation of the ERP will be dependent on the location and capability of On Site Response Team .

7.2.1.2. Identified Emergency Scenarios

The Emergency Response Plan (ERP) must be capable of managing the response to the major hazards, identified and any associated environmental risks. In addition the ERP must also address “occupational” hazards including incidents such as Single and multiple accidents requiring medical evacuation).

7.2.1.3. Emergency Classification

The required response will depend on the scale of the incident. Emergency scenarios are categorised into three levels, typically:

Tier 1 Incident (Local Alert) Tier 1 incidents require no external assistance and can be managed by the Emergency Co-ordinator using on site resources. Typical incidents may include:

Single casualty (medevac);

Oil spills <10 tonnes;

ONGC equipment damage; Tier 2 Incident (Site Alert) Tier 2 incidents cannot be managed entirely on site. ONGC response is typically activated, Incidents may include:

Substantial security incident;

Multiple casualty (medevac);

Oil spill 10-100 tonnes ;

Substantial fire;

Cyclone/flooding;

Cultural conflict.

Tier 3 Incident (External Alert) Tier 3 incidents are major emergencies beyond site resources with the potential to impact beyond the site limit. External assistance is required and there is immediate mobilisation of ONGC. Typical incidents may include:

Major fire / explosion;

Oil spill >100 tonnes;

Fatality. It should be noted that for any tier incident, when determining tiers for oil spills, the quantity of oil spilt is not the only factor. The environment potentially threatened by the oil is also considered in determining the tier of spill.

7.2.1.4. Emergency Response Activation

The level of callout to deal with an emergency needs to be defined and co-ordinated by ONGC. The Emergency Response Contact directory will be updated before the actual commencement of EPS activity.



146

7.2.2. Disaster Prevention Methods

Effective emergency management should include both detailed emergency response measures and appropriate prevention measures. It may be necessary for ONGC to maintain:

Properly documented EHS Management System

Competent personnel trained in disaster response duties

Appropriate detection equipment (gas detection including H2S, smoke detection, radar)

Suitable firefighting equipment available and personnel properly trained in its use

Operational emergency alarm and PA system

Effective communication equipment including VHF Radio, V-SAT / INMARSAT, mobile VHF radios

All equipment required for emergency response undergoes routine maintenance and is regularly tested / calibrated

Detailed evacuation procedures including appropriate muster areas, escape routes including clear signs where appropriate. Personnel should be made aware of evacuation procedures through appropriate training.

Regular drills/exercises to test ERP’s

Regular review of Emergency Response Plans with modifications as required.

ONGC is also having Operational Risk Management Committee

Decommissioning Phase of EPS At the completion of EPS Operation, an orderly withdrawal of all personnel and the removal of all Vessels, equipment, fixed and non-fixed items from the EPS site will be undertaken. All concrete or steel installations would be removed to at least 1 m below ground level, so as to ensure that there are no protruding surface structures. In the unlikely event if soil is found to be contaminated, measures would be taken to remove or treat appropriately all contaminated topsoil to promote its remediation. has accorded top priority to safety and protection of environment in the operational areas. The activities are oriented towards prevention rather than cure and conducted in such a way as to ensure:

Health and safety of its employees

Protect the environment

Optimal utilization of oil field equipment, instruments without leading to any health hazards.

Health, safety and environment (HSE) matters have given equal status with all other primary business objectives.

7.3. Health and Safety

The field Development project proposes establishment of EPS at BTSAD with the required process facilities for producing gas from four existing well. A robust HSE Management Plan is proposed to be put in place so as to mitigate the negative impacts and the entire project is implemented in a sustainable way.

7.3.1. Occupational Health

An Occupational Health Management System is proposed to be kept in place aimed at promoting and maintaining physical, mental and social wellbeing to the highest degree among the personnel by monitoring their health and the state of the workplace. Occupational



147

Health monitoring shall be made applicable to all the workers at all installations and work centres. Scope of activities The scope of activities include the following –

Personnel Surveillance: Periodic Medical Examination, Pre-Employment Medical Examination and Pre- Placement Medical Examination. Investigations will be carried out at authorized laboratories.

Workplace Surveillance: Monitoring of all workplaces for Hazards Ergonomic Assessment of the Workplace Sanitation Evaluation will be carried out including portability of Water

Educative Function:– By imparting training in:

Occupational Health

Preventive Medicine

First Aid Training

Occupational Health Surveillance Program- Onshore operations comes under Mines Act, 1952 and as per Mines Act every person employed in a mine must undergo PME (Periodical Medical Examination) by an approved physician / Hospital at a reasonable periodic interval i.e.

For age up to 45 yrs - Once in 5 years

For age from 46 to 55 yrs - Once in 3 years

For ages above 55 yrs - Once every year The operator herewith ensures that he will adopt all measures to safeguard the health of the employees.

7.3.2. Safety An effective Safety Management System will be put in place to prevent accidents, hazardous incidents and eliminate or minimise their consequences. Enforcement of Safety Safety shall be ensured through repeatedly highlighting its utility in preventing loss of life and property and providing training to employees on safe working. Following modes will be followed for this:

Work Permit System

Job safety analysis

Training of employees and contractors

Surprise checks

Drills

Operating manuals / Safety manuals HSE Information & Corporate EHS Policy of ONGC is provided as Annexure III. Monitoring of Systems Following systems will be monitored regularly for effective implementation:

Checking of safety interlocks

Internal audits of facilities in line with OISD-STD-145

Safety facilities as per OISD 189

Management of change

Testing / Inspection of equipment



148

Checking of fire detection and protection system Safety Promotion Visuals play an important role in reminding personnel of safety information. Therefore, display of following information will be done in the premises:

Safety precautions for critical operations at strategic locations

Safety posters and slogans

Safety records

Do's and Don'ts at chemicals handling/storage/operation areas

Need for Wearing helmet and other Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs)

Labelling of chemicals

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)

Safety manuals, Rules and Regulations

Safety News Letters & bulletins

Dissipation of incident information Work Permit In case, work is required to be performed in the plant / facility by any person other than the operating personnel of that area, a duly authorized written permit will be obtained by the person / agency executing the work before commencement of the work. Based on the nature, the work would be undertaken under different types of permits. For example, following jobs will be undertaken with the duly issued hot work permit: Cutting, Welding, Excavation, Road/Dyke cutting, Electrical lock out / Energising, Confined space entry, Boxing up of a vessel, Working on fragile roof structures, Radiography, Material Handling in operational areas, Crane operation etc. OISD-STD- 105 on Work Permit System will be adhered to regarding issuance of work permits. Safe Work Practices Safe Work Practices will be followed during EPS Construction and production operations as given below: Safety during Dismantling Systems Dismantling of the structures in old location, transportation and erection of the same at new location. The job involves handling of heavy loads up to 20-30 tons using various heavy material handling operations, transportation from location to location involves accidental risk and such transportation to be handled with extreme care. In EPS building the risks of accident are therefore involved in:

Use of heavy material handling equipment.

Transportation of heavy equipment from one location to another location. EPS operations involve risks associated with work at height, handling tools in awkward positions, danger of falling object on workers on the ground.

The recommendations listed below serve as a guide for minimizing hazards during rigging up and dismantling operations.

All sheaves and shafts of the hoisting system will be checked (zin poles, hoisting sheaves, equalizer sheave, crown block sheaves, traveling block sheaves). All the sheaves, bearings and bushings to be greased.

All the lifting ropes, casing lines and clamps fitted on lifting ropes will be checked. Lifting rope / bull line will be lubricated prior to lowering mast, draw works and sub-structure.

Draw works brake, eddy current brake, hydrometric brake will be checked.



149

Counter pre-loading tanks will be filled completely with water.

Required power availability to draw works will be checked.

Required normal working air pressure to hoisting clutch to be checked.

Zin poles or Mole trucks for dragging tanks and heavy equipment in slushy areas will be used.

All the threaded joints will be greased and the threaded ends will be covered by thread protectors to protect joints during transportation

Lifting hooks will be checked for any cracks or damage during lifting and loading. Production Operations In the Production facilities, separators and pipelines under pressure, storage tanks and heater-treaters, are the basic facilities. Leakage from flow lines inside Early Production System (EPS) and also incoming and outgoing lines can result into oil spills/gas leakage. This can lead to fires. Therefore any oil spill/gas leakage is to be rectified on priority. The safety hazards common to installation are as follows: Pressurized Vessels & Pipelines The safety valves, pressure gauges and liquid level controls of separators need frequent checks. The separator and its safety valves unless tested and maintained properly can result in bursting of separator with serious consequences. The safety valve will be tested once in six months Back flow of fluids from separator to wellhead can also be hazardous. Hydrate formation in production systems and well heads needs special attention by taking suitable remedial measures. Fire Hazards Flammable matter like oil and gas are constantly present and unless sources of ignition like naked lights, frictional sparks, electrical sparks, static electric charges, lightning, Overheated surfaces, are carefully controlled, fire could be a major hazard. In some cases, even auto ignition takes place. Accumulation of Oil Vapour Oil vapour which is heavier than air tends to settle down and accumulate near loading and unloading point for road tankers, open pits containing accumulation of oil and around storage tanks, particularly during winter. The accumulated oil vapour can be easily ignited and may even explode. In a confined space, they tend to make the atmosphere leaner in oxygen content-confined to difficulty in normal breathing (asphyxiation) and/or adverse physiological effects (with more than 0.1% concentration of hydrocarbons). Explosion Hazard Large quantities of gas released from separators is generally piped away from the installation and flared, but in case the flare is extinguished, large quantities of unburnt gas is discharged into the atmosphere, which may lead to an explosion. Pyrophoric iron sulphide in lines and vessels can also cause an explosion when coming in contact with air. Safe practices Recommendations listed below will provide guidance for safety in the light of hazards mentioned above. Separators and Pipelines

Separators, connecting lines, valves, flow lines and collector lines will be hydraulically tested to one and half times the maximum working pressure and the installation will not be commissioned unless the test results are satisfactory.



150

Separators, heater treater, bath heaters and other pressure vessels will be periodically hydraulically tested once in 3 years at 1.5 times the max permissible working pressure and a record will also be maintained thereof.

Thickness measurements of all pressure vessels will be done at least once in 3 year.

Every separator will be provided with a safety valve. The pressure leaving safety device shall be set to open at a pressure not exceeding 10% of the maximum allowable working pressure.

The safety valve will be installed directly on the separator and no valves will be fitted between the vessel and the line connecting the safety valve. Every safety valve will be provided with an arrangement for testing its efficiency.

Suitable working platforms with stair cases and hand rails will be provided for maintenance of separators and its safety valves. The discharge line of every safety valve will be connected to the flare line for safe disposal of gas released from it.

Safety valves of the pressure vessels like separators, scrubbers, heater treaters etc. will be tested at least once in six months and record thereof.

At the header manifold, a non-return valve will be provided in each flow line connected to well.

In each flow line, an emergency shut-off valve will be installed on the upstream side of the non- return valve, which can be closed manually in case emergency.

At the overhead crossing of a steam pipeline, a condensate trap will be provided just before such crossing, otherwise the condensate may cause severe hammer in the pipeline.

A steam trap will also be provided in the pipeline immediately before it enters the storage tank.

Thermal insulation with asbestos rope will be provided in the exhaust pipes of bath heater and heater treater at least up to a height of 1.8 meters from ground level.

Process areas like separators platform, heater treater area, pump house, tank farm etc. will have free passage for safe working of operators. In case of interference by pipelines, in the free movement of operator, suitable walk ways will be made.

Approach road for fire tenders inside EPS will be in good condition and there will not be any interference from any flow lines, overgrowth of grass etc.

Precautions against Fire

The protected area surrounding the EPS will be enclosed by boundary walls or barbed wire fencing, not less than 1.8 meters in height, with gates which can be duly locked. Guards will be posted at the gates when so required, to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.

Smoking is strictly prohibited inside the production installation. Prohibitory sign for these precautions will be displayed at the gate on the panel board. Anybody entering the EPS and if carrying any smoking apparatus like cigarettes, matches and lighters etc. must deposit the same at the gate.

Emergency exit : In an enclosed area, before undertaking any operation, it will be ensured that there are at least two escape ways, unobstructed and easily accessible,

Hand tools used for loosening or tightening etc. It will be of non-sparking type.

The following precautions will be taken to prevent electrical spark:

In every zone-1 hazardous area, only intrinsically safe flame-proof electrical apparatus and equipment(s) will be used, whereas in every zone-2 hazardous area, only flame-proof or increased safety or pressurized electrical apparatus and equipment will be used.

EPS will be protected against lightning by suitable lightning arresters which will be installed as per I.S. standards. (IS: 4850-1968)

- Lightning arresters will not be installed directly on storage tanks.



151

While loading and unloading oil in road tankers, its engine will be stopped and battery isolated from the electric circuit. The engine will not be re-started and the battery will not be connected to the electric until all tanks and valves have been securely closed.

At the loading arm, all oil pipelines, filling and delivery hoses, metallic loading arm, swivel joints, tank and chassis of tank vehicle will be electrically continuous and be efficiently earthed.

Overheated surfaces can cause fire. The probable sources are, the discharge line of compressed air at high pressure, exhaust pipe of diesel and gas engines, chimneys of the emulsion heater treater, water bath heater and steam lines going to storage tanks.

- The chimneys will be adequately insulated. The compressed air discharge lines will be connected to inter-coolers with automatic temperature recorder alarm, which will sound a warning if the temperature exceeds the prescribed limit.

- In case of diesel engine, the exhaust gas will be conditioned so as to reduce its temperature.

Hot work permit will be issued to the concerned persons by shift In-charge with approval from area In-charge, prior to commencement of any hot job inside the installations.

Efficient earthing of all vessels and equipment’s will be done to take care of static charges. Earthing connections will be checked every year and measured values will be recorded in a register. Earthing pits will be clearly marked for inspection.

Spillage of flammable liquids will be minimized to mitigate risk of fire and will be immediately cleaned.

All firefighting equipment’s will be maintained in good condition.

Electrical control room, switch gear room, computer room etc. will be maintained in good condition. There will be rubber mats in electrical control room and switch gear room and cables will be properly led in trenches. Lighting fixtures will be permanent and no hanging wires or naked bulbs are permitted. There will not be-any leakage of water from ceiling in electrical control room and switch gear room. Starter panels of all equipment’s will be in good condition and rear doors will be closed when equipment’s are in operation.

Use of electrical equipment including lighting fitting is prohibited in zone-0 hazardous area. Flame proof and intrinsically safe lighting fitting/equipment’s will be used in Zone- I and Zone- 2 hazardous area as per IS - 2148 - 1968 and IS - 8289 - 1976 and IS - 2206 - 1976.

Vessel entry permit is to be issued by area in-charge with due approval of mines manager prior to taking up cleaning / maintenance jobs in any vessel.

Fire hydrants, water sprinkler system, foam lines of storage tanks will be inspected regularly to ensure their smooth functioning.

Regular inspection of well head fittings is to be carried out for any leakage of gas/oil. To prevent unauthorized entry to the EPS, periodical inspection of fencing is to be done.

Flammable material will be kept away from source of heat and stored in suitable cans and at proper place.

All electrical equipment’s and fittings will be maintained properly.

First aid items will be maintained properly.

Regularly removal of accumulated waste material like dry vegetation is to be ensured.

Routine maintenance of all machinery will be ensured.

Close supervision of premises at all times is to be ensured.

There will be proper drainage system in process areas. Necessary sumps will be available in all critical areas like pump house, storage tanks, separator platforms etc. to collect and recover spilled oil.

Water supplies will be adequate.



152

Prohibitory caution signs will be displayed at all critical places. Precautions against Accumulation of Oil Vapour Loading and unloading points and open pits into which oil is discharged are the possible locations where oil vapours may accumulate. It may also accumulate near the storage tank. Regular checks with explosive meter will be made for presence of flammable vapours, particularly in the night hours and in winter months. Whenever any dangerous accumulation of flammable vapours is observed, immediate steps will be taken to remove such accumulation by arranging adequate ventilation in the area. Suitable air blowers may be used for the purpose. Disposal of Gas through Flare System

A flare line shall be sited to a flare stack not less than 30 meters from any part of the EPS or petroleum storage tanks.

As far as practicable, the flare line will be laid below ground. It will be provided with a bleeding valve and a knock-out drum to drain condensate from the line. In case of any overhead crossing, the bleeding valve will be located immediately before such crossing on the upstream side. Regular draining of the flare line is essential, as otherwise accumulation of liquid in the line may restrict passage and create a back pressure at the separators which may in turn lead to failure of the system.

The flare line will terminate with a vertical riser pipe of not less than 9 meters in height.

When the gas flow is intermittent, the flare line will be provided with a pilot burner with remote control electrical ignition device to ensure that the pilot burner is continuously lighted.

At the flare stack, a water seal drum will be provided to prevent ingress of air into the flare line.

Leakage of gas if any in flare line and in flare stack will be attended on priority.

There will not be any seepage of effluent from effluent evaporation pit located in gas flare area.

Effluent evaporation pit will be prepared with suitable masonry boundary wall and asbestos enclosure to prevent seepage and transmission of heat respectively.

Passage to flare area will be kept accessible and free from dry vegetation.

Safe distances

Smoking is strictly prohibited within 30 meters of EPS, separator, petroleum storage tank or other sources of flammable gases.

No naked light or open flame or spark will be permitted within 30 meters of EPS or any place where petroleum is stored.

No flame type, crude oil treater or other flame type equipment will be placed within 30 meters of any well, separator, petroleum storage tank except where such flame type equipment is fitted with a flame arrester.

Flare will be sited not less than 30 meters from any part of EPS or petroleum storage tanks


Chapter 8 : Project Benefits

153

8. PROJECT BENEFITS

The project benefits are summarized below based on the demand and growth of the country 8.1 Benefits for the Country

India's demand for petroleum products is growing at a rapid rate, having virtually doubled from 30 million tons in 1980-81 to about 70 million tons in 1995-96 to 155 million tons in 2006-07. The oil and gas sector is among the six core industries in India and plays a major role in influencing decision making for all the other important sections of the economy. In June 2015, total crude oil imports were valued at US$ 8.7 billion. In FY 2014, imports accounted for more than 80 per cent of the country’s total oil demand With India developing gas-fired power stations, consumption is up more than 160 per cent since 1995. Gas consumption is likely to expand at a Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of 21 per cent during FY 2008–2017 With a view to meeting this growing demand, the new hydrocarbon policy aims at encouraging investments in oil/gas exploration and production. Current projections for demand and supply indicate that the level of self-sufficiency is likely to decline to about 30% over the next few years. Substantial efforts are, therefore, necessary to boost the level of exploration activity in the country so that new reservoirs can be identified to significantly enhance production of crude oil and gas in the years to come. India today remains one of the least explored regions with oil density per thousand sq. km being among the lowest. It is also evident that large amounts of capital investments are necessary if exploration efforts are to be substantially augmented. It is therefore required to attract both the national as well as, private sector oil companies to invest in this critical area.

8.2 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure The beneficial impact of hydrocarbon development on the civic amenities will be substantial after the commencement of project activities. The basic requirement of the community needs will be strengthened by extending health care, educational facilities to the community, building/strengthening of existing roads in the area. ONGC will initiate the above amenities either by providing or by improving the facilities in the area, which will help in uplifting the living standards of local communities. The construction of new roads in the project area will enhance the transportation facilities. With improved transportation facilities there is always a scope for development.

8.3 Improvement in the Social Infrastructure

Generation of employment: The project will create opportunities for direct and indirect employment;

Increase in purchasing power and improved standard of living of the area; Establishment of small and medium scale industries may be developed as

consequence; Increased revenue to the state by way of royalty, taxes and duties; Regular Fund flow to local market; Overall Growth of the neighbouring Area viz.:


Chapter 8 : Project Benefits

154

o Agriculture and Animal husbandry; o Health and family welfare; o Watershed development; o Sustainable livelihood and strengthening of village Self Help Groups; and o Infrastructure development.

In addition to above, due to increase in purchasing power of local habitants: There shall be significant change in the socio-economic scenario of the area; • The proposed project shall enhance the prospects of employment; Recruitment for the unskilled and semiskilled workers for the proposed project will

be from the nearby villages; The basic amenities viz., roads, transportation, electricity, proper sanitation,

educational institutions, medical facilities, entertainment, etc. will be developed as far as possible; and

Overall the proposed project will change living standards of the people and improve the socio-economic conditions of the area.

8.4 Employment Potential The impact of the project on the economic aspects can be clearly observed. The proposed project activities will provide employment to persons of different skills and trades. The local population will be given preference to employment. The employment potential will ameliorate economic conditions of these families directly and provide employment to many other families indirectly who are involved in business and service oriented activities. The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project shall upgrade the prosperity of the region. This in-turn will improve the socio-economic conditions of the area. During construction phase of the project, this project will provide temporary

employment to many unskilled and semi-skilled labourers in nearby villages; This project will also help in generation of indirect employment to those people

who render their services for the personnel directly working in the project; and In case the hydrocarbon is established in the block, considerable number of

people will be benefited by provision of services to the residents in for of employment opportunities. Thus, the direct and indirect employment generation by this project.

The present trend of out migration for employment is likely to reduce due to better economic opportunities available in the area. During the construction phase about 25 people on average per day will be employed.


Chapter 9 : Cost Benefit Analysis

155

9. COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

Terms of Reference did not specify anything about Cost Benefit Analysis


Chapter 11 : Summary & Conclusion

156

10. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 Preamble

This chapter provides a description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that mitigative measures are implemented and their effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA. Based on the evaluation of impacts and baseline conditions, an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) has been delineated to mitigate the adverse impacts. The EMP includes formulation, implementation and monitoring of environmental protection measures. The EMP features guidelines and methodologies to be adopted at different stages of the proposed project for mitigating the impacts of various activities. The EMP is herein outlined after taking into account the various Acts, Rules and Regulations/Standards concerned with the environmental management.

10.2 EMP during Various Project Phases

Environmental Management Plan of the project during operation phase details the environmental quality control measures which will be taken up and which are proposed by complying with the stipulated standard limits specified by CPCB and State Pollution Control Board. Any deviation from the existing baseline conditions due to the proposed activity and likely impacts should be mitigated with a proper EMP. Environmental Management Plan which will be implemented is detailed under the following heads.

Air Pollution Control

Noise Mitigation

Wastewater Management

Solid Waste Management

Implementation of EMP and Monitoring Program

10.3 Environmental Policy of the Company

ONGC has a well laid Environment Management Systems (EMS) and contingency plans and processes that help them in preventing, mitigating and controlling environmental damages and disasters, which may be caused due to their operations or that of a member of its value chain.

10.4 Organisation Structure - EHS & Safety

A dedicated team at site will be responsible to ensure project operations with due reference to environment management and the Safety of the workers.

10.5 Audit and Review Review and audit is essentially a management tool. However, its application is crucial at the operational level for verification and feedback on the effectiveness of organization system and environmental performance. Basically, Auditing involves in the following items:

Line management system

Awareness and training

Procedures: standards, targets

Plans: waste, contingency, pollution control compliance

Monitoring programmes



157

Verify Environmental Impact Assessment

Verify mitigation

Reporting and communication

Documentation

Feedback Internal Audit A system of HSEC auditing should be undertaken at each project operation and includes the use of trained internal and external auditors. In addition, auditing should be undertaken to ensure compliance with all the applicable legislations. Audit Type Frequency

Internal – from other site in-charge Every month

External - independent expert Every 3 months ONGC shall depute internal/external auditors who are trained and certified as competent EMS auditors by an independent and external standards organisation. The results of monitoring and auditing shall be regularly reported through the senior management team to ensure that action items are addressed. Non-Conformity, Corrective Action and Preventative Action As per the Environmental Policy of the Company, non-conformities, corrective actions and preventative actions shall be managed in accordance with Non-Conformance, Preventative and Corrective Action Procedure. This procedure, which relates to all projects of the company, should detail the processes to be utilised with respect to the identification of non-conformances, the application of appropriate corrective actions(s) to address non-conformances and the establishment of preventative actions to avoid non-conformances. The key elements of the process include: i. Identification of Non-Conformance and/or Non-Compliances; ii. Recording of Non-Conformance and/or Non-Compliance iii. Evaluation of the Non-Conformance and/or Non-Compliance to determine specific

corrective and preventative actions; iv. Corrective and preventative to be assigned to responsible person and v. Management Review of corrective actions to ensure the status and effectiveness of

the actions.

10.6 Management Review A comprehensive review of the objectives and targets associated with the individual Project of the company shall be undertaken. These reviews, which include involvement from the senior site management and other key site personnel, assess the performance of the plant over the previous year and develop goals and targets for the following period.

Maintenance of Records: Environmental monitoring program will be carried out by approved agency. The monitoring reports for every season will be regularly submitted to Regional Office of MoEF&CC. Also, one copy of the monitoring report will be kept in site office. The health records of the workers will be kept in site office as well as with the Doctor appointed for the purpose. All the records will be properly kept and maintained by the management.



158

10.7 Air Environment

All the equipment operated during various stages of the EPS will be used within specified design parameters. Flaring will be undertaken and to minimize impacts of emissions, minimizing the Emergency Flaring through careful planning has to be achieved.

10.8 Noise Environment Adequate noise mitigation measures, especially for EPS & Gas Engine operations have been proposed and the same will be monitored at site. It is recommended that while procuring major noise generating equipment such as gas engines, flare stacks etc. it will be checked that all mufflers are in good working order and that the manufacturers have taken the normal measures for minimizing the noise levels. Use of ear muffs/plugs and other protective devices must be provided to the workforce in noise prone areas. Enclosures around noise sources may be provided depending on the size of the unit.

10.9 Water Environment The water requirement in EPS is mainly meant for cooling and domestic use. While the former consumes the majority of water requirement, the water requirement for domestic use is very less. In the present project proposal, the daily water consumption will be around 20 m

3/d of which 15 m

3/d will be used for cooling and 5 m

3/d will be used for domestic

purposes including drinking.

Wastewater handling: Produced water storage and loading bay facilities to transfer produced water to Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms.

10.10 Land Environment All precautions to avoid spillages and leakages of chemicals and ONGC will be taken at site. Waste ONGC trapping trays will be provided and all waste ONGC will be collected adequately and stored for disposal as per regulatory norms. The contaminated Soil will also be collected and disposed as per regulations. Treated solid wastes, which have to be disposed on land, will be made on adequately prepared waste pits. Soils in the region have moderate infiltration rates amenable to groundwater pollution. Considering this fact and poor ground water quality, every precaution needs to be taken to avoid spillages of chemicals on Soils to avoid further deterioration of groundwater quality and danger to Soil microbial populations in Soils which are sensitive to hydrocarbon. Treated solid wastes, which have to be disposed on land, will be made on adequately prepared waste pits.

10.11 Waste Management Plan (WMP) The Waste Management Plan (WMP) will cover disposal of all wastes with further reference to offsite disposal of those wastes, which cannot be dealt with onsite. The objectives of the WMP are:



159

To provide the necessary guidance for the reduction and management of wastes generated at EPS.

To comply with all current Indian environmental regulations.

To meet industry standards on waste management and control.

To prevent occurrence of any environmental degradation within the locality due to waste handling.

Disposal Options The following disposal options needs to be available on site. However, it will be necessary to evaluate the suitability of various waste specific technologies for the site and select an option that will cause minimum environmental impact on the surrounding.

Wastes which cannot be handled at the EPS site will be removed to a designated offsite and suitably disposed for reuse/recycling etc.

Produced Hydrocarbon Flaring will be done in relevance with all National & International standards.

Sewage will be diverted to septic tank or soak pit.

Produced water storage and loading bay facilities to transfer produced water to Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms.

Waste Oil/Spent oil shall be sent to the Authorized Recyclers

Waste Reduction, Reuse & Recycle

Waste reduction efforts shall concentrate on reuse, recycling.

Containers will be punctured and eventually compacted and sent for disposal.

Chemical drum containers will be fully emptied, labelled with contents and removed offsite for further handling and disposal.

Used medical wastes, inclusive of but not limited to bandage material, syringes etc., will be collected in a special collection drum to minimize manual handling. Contents of the drum will be labelled as biomedical waste and shipped offsite for treatment/ disposal.

Waste and lubricants generated in the EPS process will be sent to authorized recyclers. All spent lead acid batteries are to be sent for recycling to authorized waste contractors.

All waste storage area within the site will have proper bunds to prevent any escape of contaminated runoff. It shall be ensured that any runoff from such temporary storage area will channelized into the waste-water pit, adequately treated and discharged in compliance with the regulatory requirements.

10.12 Storage and handling of material and spoils

Site preparation shall carefully handle soil, sub-soil, and top soil; and store solid powdery raw materials properly in order to minimize the risk of windblown materials and dust. In addition, work instructions shall be given for handling fugitive dust emissions that may be generated. All loading and unloading activities shall be carried out as close as possible to the storage facilities. Dry cement handling would be enclosed to the extent possible. It will be ensured that lids of all containers containing volatile substances/chemicals are properly fitted. All chemical and fuel storage areas will have proper bunds so that contaminated run-off cannot escape into the storm water drainage system. Personal protective equipment shall be provided to all the workers involved in handling of hazardous materials.



160

10.13 Greenbelt Development Plan

It is a well-known fact that the trees have substantial inter-specific as well as intra-specific variation in air pollution tolerance (Garsad and Rutter 1982 and Scholz, 1981). Therefore, plant species act as bio-monitoring agent to monitor the air environment as well as to keep and maintain the project environ healthy.

10.13.1 Selection of Plant Species

Species for greenbelt development / plantation have been suggested by following Guidelines for Developing Greenbelts, Programme Objective Series: PROBES / 75 / 1999 - 2000 (CPCB, 2000). The greenbelt development not only functions as foreground and background landscape features resulting in harmonizing and amalgamating the physical structures of the port with surrounding environment, but also acts as pollution sink. It will also check soil erosion, make the ecosystem more complex and functionally more stable and make the climate more conducive.

10.13.2 Locations of Greenbelt

Greenbelt / plantation will be developed on the site boundary of the premises.

10.13.3 Recommended Species

As per CPCB Greenbelt development guidelines, area (West Godavari district) falls in the East Coast Plains and Hill Region, Sub Zone: South Coastal Andhra, Climate: Semi-arid. Following 12 evergreen species are recommended for greenbelt development.

TABLE 93: PLANT SPECIES SUGGESTED FOR GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT / PLANTATION

S. No.

Species Name Common / Local

Name Habit Growing Speed

Evergreen / Deciduous

1 Aegle marmelos Mooredu, Urdu - Bel. Tree Slow growing Evergreen

2 Ailanthus excelsa Peddamaanu. Tree Quick growing Evergreen

3 Azadirachta indica VeepocheHu Tree Quick growing Evergreen

4 Buchanania lanzan Mortichettu or Saara. Tree Quick growing Evergreen

5 Cassia siamea Seemotangeedu. Tree Quick growing Evergreen

6 Cocus nueifera Narikelamu Tree Slow growing Evergreen

7 Dalbergia sisoo rasissoo Tree Quick growing Evergreen

8 Ficus benghalensis Peddamarri Tree Quick growing Evergreen

9 Ficus religiosa Ashavathomu Tree Quick growing Evergreen

10 Polyalthia longifolia Asokamu Tree Quick growing Evergreen

11 Syzygium cumini Neereedu_ Tree Quick growing Evergreen

12 Tamarindus indica Chintachettu Tree Quick growing Evergreen

10.13.4 Plantation Technique Following basic procedures need to be followed for greening the area.



161

Plantation of tree species required approx. 1m3 pit for soil enrichment

Pit should be filled with imported soil with 3:1:1 the ratio of sand, silt and form yard manure

Procure well grown saplings of recommended species from the nearby Forest Department nursery

Make 1m diameter ring bund around the planted saplings for water retention

Watering of sapling is species specific, therefore watering need to be done once in 2 or 3 days for a period of two years

Soil wok and weeding need to be done once in a two months

10.13.5 Monitoring Protocol

The plantations need to be managed by regular watering, soil enrichment work, applying manure, weeding and provide proper protection.

Replacement of sapling (replanting) required whenever mortality occurs in the plantation during the growth stage.

Plantation requires after care for a period of minimum five years till the saplings attain matured tree stage.

Any damage to the developed greenbelt due to any natural or cattle activity should be redeveloped and maintained by the agency.

10.14 Socio-economic Development Activities

ONGC works proactively and may execute/implement CSR initiatives alone or in partnership with other organizations (which may include Government Agencies/Non-Government Agencies) to mobilize core competencies and resources on significant long term CSR programs and projects in its operational areas. ONGC shall undertake its CSR initiatives under various key thrust areas. ONGC may execute/implement CSR activities/projects alone or in partnership with executing/implementing agency/other organization (which may include Government Agencies/Non-Government Agencies).

10.15 Site Security During pre-commissioning phase, as construction site is an unsafe place for trespassers and the site shall be secured by fencing and manned entry points. Further, during the EPS operation phase also, continuous monitoring of the site shall be ensured. The site has good boundary wall constructed to avoid trespassers

10.16 Budgetary Provision for Environmental Protection and EMP Cost

The cost of the project is estimated as Rs 250.00 Crores. Out of this, the EMP budget has been estimated at Rs 12.5 Crores.



162

11. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

Oil & Natural Gas Corporation (ONGC) proposing to establish one Early Production System (EPS) at BTSAD, Bantumilli South Field, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh. The envisaged gas production will be around 7 LSCMD. For early monetization of the gas of Bantumilli south field, ONGC is interested to install modular surface facilities at BTSAD. The processed gas is to be routed to common gas carrier of M/s.GAIL and hence to meet PNGRB guidelines.

As per the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14th September 2006, the proposed EPS project falls under 'Category A' of project or activity type 1(b).

11.1 Location Details of the Project

The location of EPS is in BTSAD, Bhimavaram, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh. Bhimavaram Railway Station is at a distance of about 14 kms and Rajahmundry Airport is around 85 km from the project area. EPS is located at Coordinate 16° 25’ 15.1”N and 81° 29’ 57.8”E.

11.2 Importance of the Proposed Project India is not among the major producers of crude oil, as it doesn't have much oil reserves. Therefore, India generally depends on imports of crude oil from other countries. About 70 to 75% of oil and 65 to 70% of natural gas consumed in India is imported from other countries. There is a heavy imbalance between oil production and consumption in India. The Indian government is encouraging exploration and production of oil and gas to a great extent. This would primarily allow India to tap its own resources there by reducing its import bill. Discovery of viable hydrocarbon reserves in the state can boost the state's economic development to a great extent. It would also catalyse influx of industries in the state. The proposed Development project is thus of immense significance for the state.

11.3 EPS Capacity

The envisaged peak gas production as per the profile is 7 LSCMD accordingly, facilities at BTSAD has been conceptualised. Since, Condensate and produced water production profile is not available, the dropout condensate and condensed water from the saturated gas had been considered for the scheme conceptualisation. The design capacity of gas processing facilities is considered as 7.0 LSCMD of gas, 135 m3/d of condensate & 25 m3/d of effluent.

11.3.1 Infrastructure Requirement

Access to EPS NH 214A is at a distance of 2.3 km’s from the EPS location towards S direction. Workforce Arrangements at EPS During Construction Phase the Manpower Requirement is 25 persons. The EPS will be operated by approx. 8 persons per shift. The manpower will operate in two shifts with continuous operations.



163

Power Requirement at EPS The total capacity of power generation facilities of Gas fired Power Plant have been envisaged to be around 0.5 MW considering the start-up and peak load requirements. Source of Water at EPS and its management Water will either be sourced from water well bore or tanker water Supply. Water requirement of approximately 20 KLD is required for EPS. Produced water storage and loading bay facilities to transfer produced water to Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms. Land Requirement The land requirement for process facilities at Bantumilli South will be (210 m X 335 m) 70350 m

2 (17.4 acres).

11.4 Baseline Environmental Status Environmental monitoring has been carried at BTSAD, during 29

th January 2018 to 22

nd

April 2018.

11.4.1 Land Use Studies The land use pattern of the total study area of 10kms radius is

Total geographical area is 307.24 Sqkm

Coastal Wet land is 3.57 Sqkm

Crop land is 101.66 Sqkm

Fallow land is 0.76 Sqkm

Inland wetland 3.98 Sqkm

Plantation 28.53 Sqkm

Reservoir Lakes or Ponds 134.87 Sqkm

Rural 14.89 Sqkm

Sandy area 2.87 Sqkm

Swampy Mangrove forest 2.96 Sqkm

11.4.2 Soil Quality The soil samples were tested at 5 locations during winter 2018 covering various land uses. As per the physical data soils are clay having more bulk density, imperatively high water holding capacity, and slow permeability. As per physical characters soils are rated as average for agriculture. As per chemical characters soil reaction (pH) soils are Neutral, slightly acidic, slightly alkaline and electrical conductivity (EC) is saline. Organic matter is sufficient. Macro nutrient like nitrogen is less and phosphorus is low to very low. Potassium is more than sufficient, calcium, magnesium is high and base saturation is high. Sodium is high and soils are of low quality for agriculture.

11.4.3 Meteorology Tropical climate conditions prevail in the block area, i.e., with hot summer and cold winter. The block receives rainfall during the south-west monsoon between June-September. This block also receives rainfall during north-east monsoon between October and December and during the hot weather period between March and May.



164

The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring equipment was installed at BTSAD. The temperature in the range of 12°C to 38°C was recorded at Narsapuram. A review of the wind rose diagram shows that the wind blows are predominantly from NE direction during study period.

11.4.4 Ambient Air Quality All the AAQ values are observed to be well within the permissible limits as there is no development near the EPS Locations. Project site is showing the highest PM10 Value of 55.6. PM 2.5 of Project site is the highest with 27.1 µg/m

3. SO2 is highest in

Gutlapoda 12.4 µg/m3 & NO2 is highest in Gollavanitippa 15.1 µg/m

3. Ozone levels are

more in Project site (9.4 µg/m3).

From the analysis of the monitored data, it infers that the air quality levels in the study area are of fairly good quality and comply with the National Ambient Air Quality Standards.

11.4.5 Water Quality The baseline water quality status in the region is established by analysing about 7 ground water samples and 4 surface water samples during winter season of 2018. Ground water quality in the region is complying with the prescribed limits as per IS: 10500-2012. Hardness of the ground water samples is ranging between 98 – 103.2 mg/l and the water sources are potable. Heavy metals are found to be below detectable limits. Ground water sample collected are meeting the requirements of standards. Heavy metals are below the detectable limits. The surface water quality is showing the influence of backwater.

11.4.6 Ambient Noise Levels The day and night equivalent noise levels observed in the residential areas during the study period are ranging between 32.7 to 39.7 dB (A) and 35.8 to 45.3 dB (A), which are within the standards suggested by CPCB. Noise generating activities are limited due to only farming and general anthropogenic activities in the villages.

11.4.7 Ecological Environment Floral Diversity: Proposed project site is existing drill site which is in possession of M/S ONGC Ltd. Some common floral species recorded from site includes Calotropis gigantea, Ipomoea aquatica, Cynodon dactylon and Alternenthera species Biodiversity database of the region reveals the presence of 74 plant species from various habitats of the region, which includes 34 species of trees, 9 climbers, 22 herbs, 1 grass and 8 shrub species. Faunal Diversity: Since the site is surrounding area mainly encompasses agriculture area and aquaculture ponds, common faunal species are expected from the site and vicinity. However, high forest areas are reported with the various wild animals. Habitats and Sensitivity of the Study Area Buffer zone of the project area possess major Upputeru river (approx. 3.8 km) and other smaller rivers like Kukkaleru & Darbharevu (backwaters), Enamaduru drain, dense scrub vegetation, aquaculture ponds (adjacent to site), agriculture area / plantation, Casuarina



165

plantation along the coastal habitats. No mangroves exists in the 10 km. Radius area / buffer zone.

11.4.8 Socio-Economic Environment

Analysis of socio - economic impacts both adverse and beneficial in the EIA study, it will improve the socio economic condition of the people. On the basis of primary and secondary data collection following conclusion has come: Study area is rural dominant and main employment pattern is agriculture and its

allied activities. More than 50% working population are engaged as a labour worker in agriculture farms. Bhimavaram town which is at an average distance of 10-15 km from the project site is main centre for all types of higher facilities for the study area population. Employment pattern as well as literacy rate is satisfactory in the villages. All villagers availed treated tap water for drinking purpose. Transportation facility is presented in all villages through public and private bus facilities.

For the project purpose manpower requirement can be fulfilled from the study area. Project activities will generate employment (skilled, semi-skilled, unskilled).As a part of CSR activities, ONGC will take care of infrastructural development of surrounding villages. Overall the project will bring development and improvement in quality of life in the surrounding villages.

11.5 Impact Assessment

CONSOLIDATED IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES FOR EPS


1 Air Emissions

Emissions from Gas Engines

Flaring of associated gas

Emissions from vehicular movement;

A flare stack of 30 m height shall be provided at existing EPS.

Gas produced shall be supplied to nearby industries and flaring shall be restricted to technical flaring only.

Fugitive emissions may result from handling and storage of hydrocarbons (crude & diesels) which are very minor.

At the time of transportation dust will be generated.

Water spraying to be done on the access roads to control re-entrained dust during dry season(if required);

The engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipment used will be maintained as such, that exhaust emissions are low and do not breach statutory limits set for the concerned vehicle/equipment type;

Ensuring the availability of valid Pollution Under Control Certificates (PUCC) for all vehicles

2 Noise Generation

Noise from Production Operation

Noise from vehicular Traffic / movement

Noise from Gas engine

Sufficient engineering control during installation of equipment’s and machineries is to be ensured to reduce noise levels at source;

Proper and timely maintenance of vehicles is to be adopted to reduce noise levels;

All noise generating operations, (except anything



166


directly related to Production operations) to be restricted to daytime only to the extent possible;

Personal Protective Equipment’s (PPE) like ear plugs/muffs is to be provided to all the workers at site and it shall be ensured that the same are worn by everyone during their shift.

3 Wastewater Generation Produced water storage and loading bay facilities to transfer produced water to Lingala ETP for further treatment and disposal to subsurface below 1000 m as per APPCB Norms.

Waste water generation will be from domestic usage and produced water.

All chemical and fuel storage areas shall have proper bunds so that contaminated run-off cannot meet the storm-water drainage system;

Company shall strive continually on Reduce, Recycle, and Fuel and Crude oil shall be stored in Reuse principle.

Chemical shall be stored in proper packing under shed, Spill control mechanism

4 Land On completion of works (installation of additional Tanks, Separators etc.) at EPS site, surplus materials and wastes will be completely removed;

Optimization of land requirement through proper site lay out design

5 Soil Management of spillage of contaminants such as oil from equipment’s, etc. on the Soil;

Chemicals to be stored at concrete paved designated area, with roofs

Proper arrangement of soak pits to be provided at the production site for disposal of domestic waste water;

Hazardous waste generated at site shall be segregated at source based on the categories and stored on concrete paved designated area with roofs.

6 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management








167









7 Socio Economic Generation of indirect employment in the region due to the requirement of workers, supply of raw material, auxiliary and ancillary works, which would marginally improve the economic status of the people.

Result in an increase in local skill levels through exposure to activities.

As the existing loose / soft surface roads, shall be upgraded to facilitate the movement of the heavy equipment required, the project in turn would lead to improvement in transport facilities.

CSR activities shall be carried out by ONGC, under the directive of Government of Andhra Pradesh which shall help in improvement of facilities in the area.

8 Flora and Fauna Impact on terrestrial fauna due to noise

Project infrastructure will disturb agriculture land of site

Spillage, leakage may produce chemical spillage which will disrupt agriculture of nearby farm

Production activity ( tanker movement) may increase deposition of dust and dust settling on the vegetation which may alter or limit plants' abilities to photosynthesize and/or reproduce

Flaring (if required) shall be restricted to technical flaring and shall be done as per OMR 1984 standard to minimize effect on avifauna.

Acoustic enclosure shall be provided to Gas Engines to reduce the noise intensity

Development of plantation of native species to substitute the access cutting, site preparation, which shall provide habitat, food and breeding areas to birds, small animals and insects

Use existing facilities (e.g. Access Roads) to the extent possible to minimize the amount of new disturbance

Avoid use of unnecessary lighting at night to avoid attracting avifauna

Site clearing is not there as the EPS area is already under the possession of ONGC and well BTSAD is located.



168


9 Occupational Health and risk to surrounding community

Noise generated during operational activity may affect the workers and staff members.

Handling of chemicals, fuel, may cause health hazard if not handled properly.

Injuries including fatality of workers as well as damage to surrounding communities.

Providing PPE to site workers and staff member or ensuring it through contractors.

Acoustic enclosures will be provided to Gas Engines and other noise generating equipment.

ONGC will develop and implement a spill management plan to prevent risk of spill which may cause health problem.

All operational activities shall be carried out in confirmation with applicable OISD standards/ regulations/ guidelines.

Regular internal / external HSE inspection shall be carried out.

Community awareness with regards to Operation activities and Risk and Hazards associated with the same shall be carried out.

10 Chemical, Fuel & Crude Storage

Fuel and Crude oil will be stored in tanks which has provision of bund,

Chemical will be stored in proper packing under shed

Spill control mechanism

11.6 Environment Management Plan

The cost of the project is estimated as Rs 250.00 Crores. Out of this, the EMP budget has been estimated at Rs 12.5 Crores.

11.7 Environmental Monitoring Program A detailed post project monitoring in respect of air, water, soil, land use, occupational noise, etc. to assess the changes has been evolved covering various phases of project advancement. A network of sampling locations around the operational facilities will be established. The monitoring shall include the compliances to legal and statutory controls imposed on the operation as well as other corporate commitment to responsible environment management. Systems for monitoring resources inputs (energy, chemical use, water, raw materials), equipment and plant performance and waste generations will also be set up. A detailed wastes management plan with monitoring programme will be in place during various phases of activity.

11.8 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan The hazard potential of oil and gas and estimation of consequences in case of their accidental release during EPS Operation has been identified and risk assessment has been carried out to quantify the extent of damage and suggest recommendations for safety improvement for the proposed facilities. Risk mitigation measures based on MCA analysis and engineering judgments are incorporated in order to improve overall system safety and mitigate the effects of major accidents. An effective Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to mitigate the risks involved has been prepared. This plan defines the responsibilities and resources available to respond to the different types of emergencies envisaged. Training exercises will be held to ensure



169

that all personnel are familiar with their responsibilities and that communication links are functioning effectively.

11.9 Project Benefits The proposed Development program will establish hydrocarbons in the block. The development of the oil field will result in considerable growth of service sector and will also generate new industrial and business opportunities in the area. Small and medium scale industries may be developed as consequence. The major benefits of the project include reduction of the oil import bill of the nation as well as reduction of the imbalance in oil production and consumption. In Operation phase ONGC require significant work force of non-technical and technical persons. Migration of persons with better education and professional experience will result in increase of population and literacy in the surrounding villages.

11.10 Administrative Aspects of Implementation of EMP The basis of the operational philosophy is that the activities proposed in oil and gas processing shall be operated in complete compliance with all applicable Laws, Regulations, Standards and Permits, the Production Sharing Contract (PSC), ONGC Energy corporate policies, procedures, specifications, rules, standards and guidelines. Detailed procedures and plans will be developed for each activity prior to operations start up. All persons working with EPS will be experienced crew with valid qualifications.

11.11 Conclusions Early Production System project has certain level of marginal impacts on the local environment. However, the proposed project has significant beneficial impact/effects in terms of providing the employment opportunities and various CSR practices to be followed by ONGC. Growth and development, in harmony with the environment, has always been the approach of ONGC. The conclusions of EIA are: The proposed project meets the compliance requirements of various environmental

regulations; Adoption of environmental friendly Best Management Practices results in

minimising the impacts on environment; Community impacts of the project will be beneficial, as the project will generate

significant economic benefits for the region; Commercial developmental activities of ONGC can reduce the import burdens of

crude oil to the nation; and With the effective implementation of the Environment Management Plan (EMP)

during the planning, design, construction and operation phases, the development

and production project can proceed without significant negative impact on the environment.


Chapter 12 : Disclosure of Consultants Engaged

170

12. DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED

12.1 Name of the Consultants

Bhagavathi Ana Labs Private Limited (A Bureau Veritas Group Company)

Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt Limited (A Bureau Veritas Group Company) is a professional services company providing Environmental Consultancy, Environmental Engineering, Analytical and Quality testing, Water Resource studies, Technical Training and Enviro-legal services. Since inception in 1984, the company has completed number of projects spread all over India. The company has qualified and experienced staff of more than 100 people operating across seven offices in India. The Professionals and Technicians include Environmental Engineers, Environmental Scientists, Environmental Planners, Chemists, Mining Engineers, Geologists, Hydro-geologists, Economic and Social Science specialists etc. Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt Limited is an ISO 9001-2008 Company and is accredited by:

Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), Govt. of India, New Delhi National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories (NABL) as per

ISO/IEC 17025:2005, in Chemical, Mechanical & Biological Fields National Accreditation Board for Education & Training (NABET) accredited

Environmental Consultants by Quality Council of India Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), New Delhi Food safety and Standards Authority of India

The firm has been engaged in the work of Environmental Impact Assessment studies, preparation of Environmental Management Plans (EMP) for the last 20 years for the purpose of obtaining clearance from Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change.

Consultants Name & Address

M/s Bhagavathi Ana Labs Private Limited (a Bureau Veritas Group Company) 7-2-C14, Industrial Estate, Sanathnagar, Hyderabad – 500 018



171

NABET CERTIFICATE



172

NABL CERTIFICATE



173

MoEF CERTIFICATE


Annexures

174

ANNEXURE I: MET DATA

2018 Temp. (°C) Dew Point (°C) Humidity (%) Sea Level Press. (hPa) Visibility (km) Wind (km/h) Precip. (mm)

Jan high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg Low sum

1 31 26 20 21 17 12 81 54 23 1012 1009 1007 10 3 2 6 3 - 0

2 30 25 20 21 18 12 90 63 23 1012 1010 1008 3 2 2 6 2 - 0

3 29 24 19 19 17 16 88 63 41 1014 1012 1009 3 2 2 6 0 - 0

4 31 27 19 17 15 12 74 46 26 1015 1013 1011 3 2 2 8 3 - 0

5 29 23 17 19 17 13 86 60 31 1014 1012 1009 3 2 2 6 0 - 0

6 29 23 17 17 16 13 85 58 31 1014 1011 1009 10 3 2 6 0 - 0

7 29 23 17 18 16 13 83 59 28 1014 1012 1005 3 2 2 6 2 - 0

8 29 24 18 18 17 14 87 66 30 1016 1013 1012 3 2 2 6 0 - 0

9 29 23 18 18 16 14 87 57 32 1017 1015 1013 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

10 29 24 19 20 18 16 85 64 42 1018 1015 1014 10 4 2 6 2 - 0

11 31 25 19 21 19 18 89 65 38 1017 1015 1012 3 2 2 6 2 - 0

12 32 27 21 22 21 19 88 70 41 1016 1013 1011 3 2 2 0 0 - 0

13 30 26 22 22 21 19 91 70 47 1015 1013 1011 4 3 2 6 2 - 0

14 31 26 21 22 21 20 95 74 46 1016 1014 1012 3 3 2 8 2 - 0

15 31 26 22 22 20 17 90 69 37 1016 1013 1010 3 2 2 6 2 - 0

16 31 26 21 22 21 19 94 73 43 1015 1012 1010 3 2 1 6 2 - 0

17 29 24 19 21 19 18 88 70 43 1015 1012 1011 3 2 0 8 2 - 0

18 30 24 18 19 18 17 92 71 43 1015 1013 1012 3 3 2 10 2 - 0

19 29 24 18 18 17 15 89 64 34 1016 1014 1012 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

20 29 24 18 18 17 13 88 61 31 1015 1013 1011 5 3 2 8 2 - 0

21 29 23 18 18 16 12 88 62 29 1014 1012 1010 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

22 29 23 17 18 16 14 90 62 30 1014 1012 1009 3 2 2 10 2 - 0

23 29 23 18 19 18 16 90 64 34 1013 1011 1009 4 3 2 6 2 - 0

24 30 24 18 20 18 16 85 65 37 1012 1010 1008 3 2 2 6 2 - 0

25 32 25 18 20 18 17 87 63 32 1012 1009 1007 3 3 2 3 0 - 0

26 30 24 18 22 18 15 88 66 38 1013 1011 1008 3 3 2 8 2 - 0

27 31 25 19 21 18 14 90 65 30 1013 1011 1009 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

28 30 25 20 21 19 16 92 66 37 1014 1013 1011 3 2 2 6 2 - 0

29 30 25 20 19 19 17 89 67 42 1015 1013 1009 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

30 31 24 19 19 18 16 86 60 32 1016 1013 1011 4 2 2 6 2 - 0

31 33 26 18 19 17 14 88 60 28 1015 1014 1012 10 4 2 6 0 - 0

https://www.wunderground.com/history/airport/VOBZ/2018/1/1/DailyHistory.html
































Annexures

175


Feb high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg Low sum

1 34 26 17 19 14 6 95 54 10 1015 1013 1011 10 3 2 6 0 - 0

2 33 24 15 17 13 8 83 48 13 1014 1013 1011 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

3 31 24 18 21 16 9 96 55 21 1015 1013 1012 10 3 0 6 2 - 0

4 31 23 16 18 15 9 77 54 20 1015 1014 1012 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

5 31 24 17 19 17 13 88 62 26 1018 1015 1014 10 4 2 6 2 - 0

6 32 26 19 19 17 13 89 61 28 1017 1014 1012 10 5 2 6 2 - 0

7 31 24 18 19 18 16 94 64 33 1014 1013 1011 10 4 1 6 2 - 0

8 32 27 22 24 20 17 99 66 33 1014 1011 1009 3 3 2 6 0 - 0

9 32 27 22 22 19 9 97 66 15 1013 1011 1009 10 3 2 6 2 - 0

10 32 27 22 22 20 17 87 65 38 1015 1013 1011 3 3 2 6 3 - 0

11 30 26 21 22 21 19 88 71 52 1016 1015 1013 3 2 2 8 3 - 0

12 32 26 21 22 20 16 91 69 29 1017 1016 1014 3 2 2 8 2 - 0

13 31 26 22 21 20 18 92 66 41 1019 1017 1015 4 2 2 11 5 - 0

14 31 26 21 20 18 13 88 63 23 1020 1018 1015 3 2 1 10 3 - 0

15 33 26 19 21 17 13 86 60 21 1020 1017 1015 3 2 2 6 2 - 0

16 33 27 20 22 19 15 88 63 25 1018 1015 1013 3 3 2 3 2 - 0

17 33 26 19 22 19 14 87 63 25 1015 1012 1009 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

18 32 27 21 21 20 19 91 70 37 1014 1012 1010 5 3 2 6 2 - 0

19 32 26 20 21 19 18 86 66 35 1014 1012 1010 10 5 2 6 2 - 0

20 33 27 20 21 19 18 87 66 34 1014 1012 1010 3 3 2 8 2 - 0

21 33 27 20 21 18 17 91 62 30 1012 1011 1008 10 4 2 6 0 - 0

22 34 27 20 21 18 14 82 57 20 1013 1010 1007 10 4 2 3 0 - 0

23 33 27 20 21 18 16 82 58 25 1013 1011 1009 10 5 2 6 2 - 0

24 33 26 19 21 18 13 95 61 24 1015 1013 1012 10 6 3 8 3 - 0

25 34 26 18 19 12 2 94 46 6 1016 1013 1011 10 5 3 6 2 - 0

26 36 26 16 19 13 5 79 44 7 1014 1012 1009 10 6 3 3 0 - 0

27 35 27 18 19 17 15 76 48 21 1013 1011 1008 10 4 2 3 0 - 0

28 36 28 20 20 18 11 82 52 16 1013 1011 1008 3 3 2 3 0 - 0






























Annexures

176


Mar high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg Low sum

1 37 29 21 22 17 11 86 47 14 1013 1010 1008 10 6 2 3 2 - 0

2 36 28 20 22 19 13 87 56 16 1013 1010 1007 10 4 3 3 0 - 0

3 37 28 19 21 17 11 89 50 16 1011 1009 1007 3 2 2 3 0 - 0

4 36 28 20 21 18 13 87 53 21 1011 1009 1007 3 3 2 3 2 - 0

5 36 28 20 22 17 12 87 53 16 1012 1010 1008 10 5 2 6 0 - 0

6 36 27 19 22 19 16 78 56 27 1013 1011 1008 10 4 3 6 2 - 0

7 34 27 19 23 21 19 98 71 31 1013 1011 1009 3 2 0 6 0 - 0

8 35 28 20 21 19 17 93 58 29 1013 1011 1009 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

9 34 29 23 24 22 21 84 68 37 1013 1011 1009 4 3 3 8 3 - 0

10 35 29 23 24 22 18 94 66 36 1013 1011 1009 3 3 1 0 0 - 0

11 35 29 22 23 21 17 89 62 30 1014 1012 1010 10 5 2 3 0 - 0

12 35 28 21 23 22 19 89 65 32 1015 1012 1010 3 3 2 6 0 - 0

13 36 29 22 22 21 21 92 62 32 1015 1011 1008 10 6 3 6 0 - 0

14 35 29 22 24 23 22 95 73 39 1012 1010 1008 4 3 1 6 0 - 0

15 37 31 24 24 23 22 92 71 37 1012 1010 1007 10 4 2 6 2 - 0

16 34 29 25 25 24 22 89 73 42 1011 1009 1007 4 3 2 8 3 - 0

17 31 28 24 24 22 19 83 74 52 1012 1010 1009 5 3 2 19 3 - 0

18 35 28 22 23 21 16 88 65 23 1013 1011 1009 10 3 1 6 2 - 0

19 36 28 21 23 21 19 87 60 28 1015 1012 1008 10 5 2 6 2 - 0

20 36 29 23 23 22 19 88 65 31 1013 1011 1008 10 5 2 3 0 - 0

21 36 30 24 24 23 18 90 63 30 1011 1009 1007 5 3 2 10 0 - 0

22 38 31 24 25 24 23 89 70 35 1009 1007 1004 3 3 1 6 0 - 0

23 38 32 25 26 24 22 88 66 31 1011 1008 1005 10 4 2 6 2 - 0

24 36 31 26 26 25 24 88 69 45 1011 1010 1008 10 4 2 8 2 - 0

25 35 30 25 25 23 21 88 64 34 1014 1012 1010 10 5 2 6 2 - 0

26 36 30 24 24 23 21 90 68 36 1014 1012 1009 3 3 1 8 0 - 0

27 37 30 24 23 22 19 88 65 26 1013 1010 1007 10 5 2 8 2 - 0

28 36 30 24 25 24 21 88 68 31 1011 1009 1007 5 3 3 8 2 - 0

29 36 31 26 26 24 23 88 67 42 1011 1008 1006 3 3 3 6 2 - 0

30 36 31 26 27 24 22 92 68 33 1010 1008 1005 10 4 3 6 2 - 0
































Annexures

177


Apr high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg low high avg Low sum

1 37 29 21 22 17 11 86 47 14 1013 1010 1008 10 6 2 3 2 - 0

2 36 28 20 22 19 13 87 56 16 1013 1010 1007 10 4 3 3 0 - 0

3 37 28 19 21 17 11 89 50 16 1011 1009 1007 3 2 2 3 0 - 0

4 36 28 20 21 18 13 87 53 21 1011 1009 1007 3 3 2 3 2 - 0

5 36 28 20 22 17 12 87 53 16 1012 1010 1008 10 5 2 6 0 - 0

6 36 27 19 22 19 16 78 56 27 1013 1011 1008 10 4 3 6 2 - 0

7 34 27 19 23 21 19 98 71 31 1013 1011 1009 3 2 0 6 0 - 0

8 35 28 20 21 19 17 93 58 29 1013 1011 1009 3 3 2 6 2 - 0

9 34 29 23 24 22 21 84 68 37 1013 1011 1009 4 3 3 8 3 - 0

10 35 29 23 24 22 18 94 66 36 1013 1011 1009 3 3 1 0 0 - 0

11 35 29 22 23 21 17 89 62 30 1014 1012 1010 10 5 2 3 0 - 0

12 35 28 21 23 22 19 89 65 32 1015 1012 1010 3 3 2 6 0 - 0

13 36 29 22 22 21 21 92 62 32 1015 1011 1008 10 6 3 6 0 - 0

14 35 29 22 24 23 22 95 73 39 1012 1010 1008 4 3 1 6 0 - 0

15 37 31 24 24 23 22 92 71 37 1012 1010 1007 10 4 2 6 2 - 0

16 34 29 25 25 24 22 89 73 42 1011 1009 1007 4 3 2 8 3 - 0

17 31 28 24 24 22 19 83 74 52 1012 1010 1009 5 3 2 19 3 - 0

18 35 28 22 23 21 16 88 65 23 1013 1011 1009 10 3 1 6 2 - 0

19 36 28 21 23 21 19 87 60 28 1015 1012 1008 10 5 2 6 2 - 0

20 36 29 23 23 22 19 88 65 31 1013 1011 1008 10 5 2 3 0 - 0

21 36 30 24 24 23 18 90 63 30 1011 1009 1007 5 3 2 10 0 - 0

22 38 31 24 25 24 23 89 70 35 1009 1007 1004 3 3 1 6 0 - 0

23 38 32 25 26 24 22 88 66 31 1011 1008 1005 10 4 2 6 2 - 0

24 36 31 26 26 25 24 88 69 45 1011 1010 1008 10 4 2 8 2 - 0

25 35 30 25 25 23 21 88 64 34 1014 1012 1010 10 5 2 6 2 - 0

26 36 30 24 24 23 21 90 68 36 1014 1012 1009 3 3 1 8 0 - 0

27 37 30 24 23 22 19 88 65 26 1013 1010 1007 10 5 2 8 2 - 0

28 36 30 24 25 24 21 88 68 31 1011 1009 1007 5 3 3 8 2 - 0

29 36 31 26 26 24 23 88 67 42 1011 1008 1006 3 3 3 6 2 - 0

30 36 31 26 27 24 22 92 68 33 1010 1008 1005 10 4 3 6 2 - 0

31 35 31 27 25 24 23 84 68 40 1010 1008 1006 10 5 3 6 3 - 0

































Annexures

178

ANNEXURE II: AMBIENT AIR QUALITY DATA

A1: Project Site

A1 PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 O3 Ammonia Benzene Benzyle-

alfa-Pyrene

Lead (Pb) Nickel as Ni

Arsenic Methane Non

Methane Hydrocarbon CO

μg/m

3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3

ng/m3

ng/m3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3

29/30.01.2018 47.6 22.0 7.4 8.5 5.6 7.6 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.0 77.4 212.4 321

30/31.01.2018 52.9 25.4 9.8 10.5 5.6 7.9 <0.01 0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 136.0 74.6 210.6 323

05/06.02.2018 52.8 25.6 7.9 9.0 5.9 8.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 132.0 73.5 205.5 332

06/07.02.2018 48.6 22.4 8.2 9.2 6.1 8.6 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 134.1 75.2 209.3 322

12/13.02.2018 49.6 23.1 10.4 11.4 6.8 8.7 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.3 70.6 211.9 332

13/14.02.2018 50.6 23.8 7.7 8.8 7.5 9.1 <0.01 0.12 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.4 74.2 199.6 312

19/20.02.2018 52.3 25.1 10.1 11.0 6.5 9.4 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 126.8 71.5 198.3 324

20/21.02.2018 48.7 22.8 9.1 10.0 5.9 7.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 127.5 75.2 202.7 352

26/27.02.2018 51.3 24.5 10.0 11.1 6.4 7.6 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 127.9 76.5 204.4 312

27/28.02.2018 50.6 24.1 7.6 8.6 8.5 7.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 129.5 74.5 204.0 321

5 / 06.03.2018 49.2 23.5 10.5 11.5 8.7 8.2 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 133.2 76.2 209.4 321

06/07.03.2018 53.6 26.1 8.5 9.8 7.9 8.3 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.0 78.0 219.0 322

12/13.03.2018 52.6 25.3 9.5 10.4 9.1 8.6 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.4 75.4 214.8 320

13/14.02.2018 52.4 24.9 9.9 10.8 9.2 8.7 <0.01 0.13 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.8 69.5 205.3 323

19/20.03.2018 51.6 24.8 9.2 10.2 9.4 8.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 129.7 68.5 198.2 302

20/21.03.2018 53.1 25.7 9.6 10.7 8.5 8 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.8 70.3 206.1 325

26/27.03.2018 48.9 22.5 10.6 11.7 8.4 7.9 <0.01 0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.1 69.5 208.6 332

27/28.03.2018 50.8 23.9 8.7 9.7 7.4 8.8 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.4 68.5 209.9 336

02/03.04.2018 54.2 26.7 9.4 10.3 7.2 9.4 <0.01 0.12 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.0 70.6 211.6 302

03/04.04.2018 50.7 24.6 8.4 9.6 7.6 9.2 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 142.1 74.1 216.2 352

09/10.04.2018 54.6 26.5 10.3 11.3 6.5 9 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 140.3 68.4 208.7 300

10/ 11.04.2018 53.4 25.9 8.1 9.1 6.4 9.2 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 138.2 70.2 208.4 320

16/17.04.2018 49.1 22.9 9.0 9.9 6.8 9.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 140.2 71.2 211.4 321

17/18.04.2018 55.6 27.1 10.9 12.3 6.6 9.3 <0.01 0.13 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 140.1 72.5 212.6 353

Min 47.6 22 7.4 8.5 5.6 7.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.4 68.4 198.2 300

Max 55.6 27.1 10.9 12.3 9.4 9.4 <0.01 0.13 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 142.1 78.0 219.0 353

Avg 51.5 24.6 9.2 10.2 7.3 8.5 <0.01 0.11 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.5 72.8 208.3 324.2

98th percentile 55.1 26.9 10.8 12.0 9.3 9.4 <0.01 0.12 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.8 77.7 217.7 352.5


Annexures

179

A2: Nagendrapuram

A2 PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 O3 Ammoni

a Benzen

e

Benzyle-alfa-

Pyrene

Lead (Pb)

Nickel as Ni

Arsenic

Methane

Non Methan

e

Hydrocarbon

CO ppm

μg/m

3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3

31.1./1.2.2018 45.0 20.3 8.3 10.1 4.8 8.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 130.2 59.9 190.1 295

1/2.02.2018 46.1 21.5 9.8 11.1 5.2 9.1 <0.01 0.28 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 133.9 60.1 194.0 298

7/8.2.2018 45.9 21.0 8.8 10.3 8.0 9.6 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 131.1 60.3 191.4 302

8/9.2.2018 48.7 23.5 9.3 10.8 5.2 8.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 133.3 60.5 193.8 321

14/15.2.2018 45.2 20.7 8.9 10.4 5.1 7.6 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 140.1 64.2 204.3 341

15/16.2.2018 46.0 21.2 8.4 10.2 4.3 7.5 <0.01 0.21 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.1 65.3 206.4 305

21/22.2.2018 50.2 25.6 10.1 11.4 8.2 8.4 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 136.4 65.6 202.0 302

22/232.2018 45.6 20.8 9.5 10.9 2.8 8.5 <0.01 0.21 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 138.6 67.8 206.4 298

28.2/1.3.2018 45.8 20.9 9.7 11.0 2.4 8.4 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.5 65.8 205.3 286

1/2.3.2018 46.2 21.6 10.9 12.1 2.6 8.8 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 136.5 68.3 204.8 298

7/8.3.2018 45.7 20.7 9.9 11.2 3.8 7.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.4 66.5 201.9 298

8/9.3.2018 48.9 23.6 9.2 10.6 4.6 7.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 138.5 67.5 206.0 245

14/15.3.2018 46.5 21.9 9.0 10.5 4.9 9.1 <0.01 0.18 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 137.5 66.8 204.3 266

15/16.3.2018 47.5 22.6 10.0 11.3 8.0 9.5 <0.01 0.14 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 136.5 66.9 203.4 287

21/22.3.2018 47.3 22.8 11.2 12.4 5.1 9.0 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.2 70.6 205.8 285

22/23.3.2018 46.8 22.1 10.5 11.8 4.9 9.3 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 134.5 70.6 205.1 292

28/29.3.2018 46.7 22.0 10.4 11.7 7.2 9.2 <0.01 0.11 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 133.3 71.2 204.5 290

29/30.3.2018 47.2 23.1 10.8 11.9 7.6 9.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 132.2 68.9 201.1 285

4/5.4.2018 47.2 22.7 11.0 12.2 7.5 9.4 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 136.8 69.8 206.6 284

5/6.4.2018 46.3 21.8 10.7 12.0 7.4 7.8 <0.01 0.16 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 138.5 66.8 205.3 286

11/12.4.2018 49.5 24.8 11.3 12.6 6.0 7.6 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.4 67.7 207.1 267

12/13.4.2018 48.2 23.4 11.5 12.8 7.6 7.8 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 137.6 67.8 205.4 269

18/19.04.2018 49.2 24.5 10.3 11.5 7.7 8.0 <0.01 0.18 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 138.6 67.5 206.1 295

19/20.04.2018 46.9 22.5 11.1 12.3 6.4 8.4 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.5 69.8 209.3 291

Min 45 20.3 8.3 10.1 2.4 7.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 130.2 59.9 190.1 245

Max 50.2 25.6 11.5 12.8 8.2 9.6 <0.01 0.28 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.1 71.2 209.3 341

Avg 47.0 22.3 10.0 11.4 5.7 8.5 <0.01 0.16 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 136.4 66.5 202.9 291.1

98th percentile 49.9 25.2 11.4 12.7 8.1 9.6

<0.01 0.18 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 140.6 70.9 208.3 331.8


Annexures

180

AQ3 Gutlapoda

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 O3 Ammoni

a Benzen

e

Benzyle-alfa-

Pyrene

Lead (Pb)

Nickel as Ni

Arsenic

Methane

Non Methan

e

Hydrocarbon

CO ppm

μg/m

3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3

2/3.2.2018 40.0 19.3 10.1 11.5 4.1 6.2 <0.01 0.11 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.1 65.2 190.3 315

3/4.02.2018 40.1 19.4 10.2 11.6 4.2 6.2 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 123.5 63.1 186.6 312

9/10.2.2018 40.2 19.5 10.3 11.7 4.0 6.4 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.2 64.2 205.4 312

10/11.2.2018 40.3 19.6 10.4 11.8 4.3 6.3 <0.01 0.23 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 120.1 63.5 183.6 311

16/17.2.2018 40.4 19.7 10.5 11.9 4.5 6.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 123.2 63.2 186.4 310

17/18.2.2018 40.5 19.8 10.6 12.0 4.6 6.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.0 64.0 189.0 311

23/24.2.2018 40.6 19.9 10.7 12.1 5.0 6.0 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 115.4 65.1 180.5 314

24/25.2.2018 40.7 20 10.8 12.2 5.1 6.4 <0.01 0.21 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 117.5 62.1 179.6 312

2/3.3.2018 40.8 20.1 10.9 12.3 5.2 6.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.9 65.1 182.0 313

3 / 4.3.2018 40.9 20.2 11.0 12.4 5.3 6.7 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 120.1 60.1 180.2 314

9/10.3.2018 41.0 20.3 11.1 12.5 5.0 5.4 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122.0 60.2 182.2 311

10/11.3.2018 41.1 20.4 11.2 12.6 4.6 7.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 134.0 63.2 197.2 301

16/17.3.2018 41.2 20.5 11.3 12.7 4.8 7.2 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 131.0 62.1 193.1 306

17/18.3.2018 41.3 20.6 11.4 12.8 4.7 6.2 <0.01 0.18 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 130.0 62.3 192.3 305

23/24.3.2018 41.4 20.7 11.5 12.9 4.9 7.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 131.0 62.0 193.0 308

24/25.3.2018 41.5 20.8 11.6 13.0 4.2 7.0 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 130.1 66.1 196.2 309

30/31.3.2018 41.6 20.9 11.7 13.1 5.2 7.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 126.4 45.8 172.2 311

31.3/1.4.2018 41.7 21 11.8 13.2 5.1 6.5 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.4 50.2 175.6 314

6/7.4.2018 41.8 21.1 11.9 13.3 5.4 6.4 <0.01 0.16 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 128.1 54.1 182.2 321

7/8.4.2018 41.9 21.2 12.0 13.4 5.5 6.2 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 124.4 55.3 179.7 321

13/14.4.2018 42.0 21.3 12.1 13.5 5.6 6.2 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 127.4 51.2 178.6 312

14/15.4.2018 42.1 21.4 12.2 13.6 5.2 4.1 <0.01 0.13 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 123.1 61.2 184.3 321

20/21.04.2018 42.2 21.5 12.3 13.7 5.3 7.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 120.1 61.1 181.2 322

21/22.04.2018 42.3 21.6 12.4 13.8 5.5 5.2 <0.01 0.11 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 118.5 58.7 177.2 331

Min 40 19.3 10.1 11.5 4 4.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 115.4 45.8 172.2 301

Max 42.3 21.6 12.4 13.8 5.6 7.2 <0.01 0.23 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 141.2 66.1 205.4 331

Avg 41.2 20.5 11.3 12.7 4.9 6.4 <0.01 0.12 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.0 60.4 185.4 313.2

98th percentile 42.3 21.6 12.4 13.8 5.6 7.2

<0.01 0.16 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 137.9 65.7 201.6 326.9


Annexures

181

AQ4 Losari


a Benzen

e

Benzyle-alfa-

Pyrene

Lead (Pb)

Nickel as Ni

Arsenic

Methane

Non Methan

e

Hydrocarbon

CO ppm

μg/m

3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3

29/30.01.2018 41.0 20.6 7.8 8.9 4.5 4.1 <0.01 0.16 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.2 70.1 209.3 331

30/31.01.2018 41.1 20.7 7.9 9.0 4.2 4.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.4 69.2 204.6 313

05/06.02.2018 41.2 20.8 8.0 9.1 5.0 4.3 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 133.2 65.5 198.7 315

06/07.02.2018 41.3 20.9 8.1 9.2 4.6 4.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 136.5 68.5 205.0 319

12/13.02.2018 41.4 21.0 8.2 9.3 3.5 5.0 <0.01 0.13 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 138.5 64.9 203.4 319

13/14.02.2018 41.5 21.1 8.3 9.4 3.9 5.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 130.1 68.5 198.6 321

19/20.02.2018 41.6 21.2 8.4 9.5 4.1 5.0 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 132.1 67.5 199.6 324

20/21.02.2018 41.7 21.3 8.5 9.6 4.5 4.3 <0.01 0.18 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 130.1 67.4 197.5 320

26/27.02.2018 41.8 21.4 8.6 9.7 4.6 4.6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 131.2 59.5 190.7 312

27/28.02.2018 41.9 21.5 8.7 9.8 4.7 4.4 <0.01 0.19 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 130.2 71.5 201.7 352

5 / 06.03.2018 42.0 21.6 8.8 9.9 6.5 5.4 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 134.2 74.6 208.8 322

06/07.03.2018 42.1 21.7 8.9 10.0 5.1 4.4 <0.01 0.14 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 134.6 74.5 209.1 314

12/13.03.2018 42.2 21.8 9.0 10.1 5.2 4.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 138.5 74.5 213.0 321

13/14.02.2018 42.3 21.9 9.1 10.2 5.8 4.5 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.4 75.1 214.5 320

19/20.03.2018 42.4 22.0 9.2 10.3 5.0 4.6 <0.01 0.16 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 135.4 74.1 209.5 311

20/21.03.2018 42.5 22.1 9.3 10.4 5.1 4.8 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 134.2 71.6 205.8 322

26/27.03.2018 42.6 22.2 9.4 10.5 5.6 5.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 132.2 66.8 199.0 311

27/28.03.2018 42.7 22.3 9.5 10.6 5.3 5.2 <0.01 0.19 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 129.5 68.4 197.9 324

02/03.04.2018 42.8 22.4 9.6 10.7 5.2 5.0 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 126.2 65.7 191.9 314

03/04.04.2018 42.9 22.5 9.7 10.8 5.8 5.2 <0.01 0.19 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 124.1 67.4 191.5 305

09/10.04.2018 43.0 22.6 9.8 10.9 5.7 5.0 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.1 62.5 187.6 306

10/ 11.04.2018 43.1 22.7 9.9 11.0 5.9 4.9 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 120.1 63.5 183.6 308

16/17.04.2018 43.2 22.8 10.0 11.1 4.6 4.7 <0.01 0.14 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 132.0 68.4 200.4 309

17/18.04.2018 43.3 22.9 10.1 11.2 6.0 4.7 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 124.0 66.4 190.4 316

Min 41.0 20.6 7.8 8.9 3.5 4.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 120.1 59.5 183.6 305

Max 43.3 22.9 10.1 11.2 6.5 5.4 <0.01 0.19 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.4 75.1 214.5 352

Avg 42.2 21.8 9.0 10.1 5.0 4.7 <0.01 0.12 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 131.9 68.6 200.5 317.9

98th percentile 43.3 22.9 10.1 11.2 6.3 5.3

<0.01 0.15 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 139.3 74.9 213.8 342.3


Annexures

182

AQ5 Dayyaladibba

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 O3 Ammonia Benzene Benzyle-

alfa-Pyrene

Lead (Pb) Nickel as Ni

Arsenic Methane Non

Methane Hydrocarbon CO ppm

μg/m3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3

31.1./1.2.2018 42.2 21.1 8.1 9.8 4.1 6.1 <0.01 0.22 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.0 65.2 190.2 306

1/2.02.2018 42.3 21.2 8.2 9.9 4.3 6.5 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 127.0 64.2 191.2 298

7/8.2.2018 42.4 21.3 8.3 10.0 4 6 <0.01 0.21 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 126.0 52.6 178.6 248

8/9.2.2018 42.5 21.4 8.4 10.1 3.9 6.6 <0.01 0.24 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 126.1 53.8 179.9 265

14/15.2.2018 42.6 21.5 8.5 10.2 5 5.4 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 123.1 53.7 176.8 280

15/16.2.2018 42.7 21.6 8.6 10.3 4.5 6.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 121.5 65.1 186.6 301

21/22.2.2018 42.8 21.7 8.7 10.4 4.6 5.4 <0.01 0.26 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 125.0 66.9 191.9 306

22/232.2018 42.9 21.8 8.8 10.5 4.8 5.3 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.0 68.4 184.4 310

28.2/1.3.2018 43.0 21.9 8.9 10.6 5.1 6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 119.6 54.4 174.0 311

1/2.3.2018 43.1 22.0 9.0 10.7 5.3 4.8 <0.01 0.25 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 121.0 53.5 174.5 315

7/8.3.2018 43.2 22.1 9.1 10.8 6 4.5 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122.0 55.4 177.4 316

8/9.3.2018 43.3 22.2 9.2 10.9 6.1 4.6 <0.01 0.24 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122.1 57.4 179.5 318

14/15.3.2018 43.4 22.3 9.3 11.0 6.3 6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 119.2 54.6 173.8 319

15/16.3.2018 43.5 22.4 9.4 11.1 4.8 5.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.4 52.6 169.0 320

21/22.3.2018 43.6 22.5 9.5 11.2 4.5 5.3 <0.01 0.22 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 121.1 54.2 175.3 321

22/23.3.2018 43.7 22.6 9.6 11.3 4.9 5.4 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 123.4 50.6 174.0 298

28/29.3.2018 43.8 22.7 9.7 11.4 4.7 5.5 <0.01 0.26 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122.0 52.4 174.4 306

29/30.3.2018 43.9 22.8 9.8 11.5 5.2 6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 119.8 48.5 168.3 307

4/5.4.2018 44.0 22.9 9.9 11.6 5 6.3 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 124.5 47.9 172.4 306

5/6.4.2018 44.1 23 10.0 11.7 5.3 6.8 <0.01 0.27 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 126.1 48.6 174.7 314

11/12.4.2018 44.2 23.1 10.1 11.8 4.6 5.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 121.4 47.8 169.2 315

12/13.4.2018 44.3 23.2 10.2 11.9 4.8 5.3 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 124.5 49.5 174.0 316

18/19.04.2018 44.4 23.3 10.3 12.0 5.6 4.8 <0.01 0.22 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 120.0 50.1 170.1 318

19/20.04.2018 44.5 23.4 10.4 12.1 5.9 5 <0.01 0.21 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122.1 50.0 172.1 315

Min 42.2 21.1 8.1 9.8 3.9 4.5 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116 47.8 168.3 248.0

Max 44.5 23.4 10.4 12.1 6.3 6.8 <0.01 0.27 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 127 68.4 191.9 321.0

Avg 43.3 22.3 9.3 11.0 5.0 5.6 <0.01 0.21 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122.3 54.9 177.2 305.4

98th percentile 44.5 23.4 10.4 12.1 6.2 6.7 <0.01 0.25 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 126.6 67.7 191.6 320.5


Annexures

183

AQ6 Gollavanitippa


a Benzen

e

Benzyle-alfa-

Pyrene

Lead (Pb)

Nickel as Ni

Arsenic

Methane

Non Methan

e

Hydrocarbon

CO ppm

μg/m

3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3

μg/m3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 ng/m

3 ng/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3 μg/m

3

2/3.2.2018 44.1 22.3 9.3 10.8 6.2 7.5 <0.01 0.43 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122.0 70.3 192.3 248

3/4.02.2018 44.2 22.4 9.4 10.9 4.3 7.8 <0.01 0.24 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 113.0 75.4 188.4 256

9/10.2.2018 44.3 22.5 9.5 11.0 3.5 8.1 <0.01 0.36 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.0 49.5 165.5 284

10/11.2.2018 44.5 22.6 9.6 11.2 5.1 8.3 <0.01 0.42 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 119.5 50.6 170.1 295

16/17.2.2018 44.6 22.7 9.7 11.4 3.6 8.5 <0.01 0.56 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 109.2 50.4 159.6 278

17/18.2.2018 44.7 22.8 9.8 11.6 4.2 8.6 <0.01 0.65 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 108.0 55.3 163.3 265

23/24.2.2018 44.8 22.9 9.9 11.8 4.1 8.4 <0.01 0.66 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 108.4 53.6 162.0 268

24/25.2.2018 44.9 23 10.0 12.0 3.5 8.1 <0.01 0.49 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 113.0 56.4 169.4 275

2/3.3.2018 45 23.1 10.1 12.2 3.9 7.6 <0.01 0.12 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 112.0 54.2 166.2 249

3 / 4.3.2018 45.1 23.2 10.2 12.4 4.6 7.9 <0.01 0.34 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 112.6 53.4 166.0 295

9/10.3.2018 45.2 23.3 10.3 12.6 5.1 8.1 <0.01 0.38 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.5 54.6 171.1 290

10/11.3.2018 45.3 23.4 10.4 12.8 5.3 6.5 <0.01 0.41 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 115.8 52.6 168.4 249

16/17.3.2018 45.4 23.5 10.5 13.0 5.6 6.8 <0.01 0.58 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 120.1 52.9 173.0 266

17/18.3.2018 45.5 23.6 10.6 13.2 5.4 7.4 <0.01 0.66 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 117.6 54.8 172.4 259

23/24.3.2018 45.6 23.7 10.7 13.4 5.2 7.5 <0.01 0.67 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 117.2 56.7 173.9 284

24/25.3.2018 45.7 23.8 10.8 13.6 3.8 7.6 <0.01 0.48 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.5 59.8 176.3 259

30/31.3.2018 45.8 23.9 10.9 13.8 3.9 7.8 <0.01 0.58 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.4 68.2 184.6 239

31.3/1.4.2018 45.9 24 11.0 14.0 4.8 6.6 <0.01 0.56 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 119.3 68.3 187.6 248

6/7.4.2018 46 24.1 11.1 14.2 5.7 6.8 <0.01 0.54 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 118.6 70.6 189.2 295

7/8.4.2018 46.1 24.2 11.2 14.4 4.2 6.9 <0.01 0.23 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 111.8 62.1 173.9 278

13/14.4.2018 46.2 24.3 11.3 14.6 6.1 7.7 <0.01 0.24 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 116.5 52.4 168.9 249

14/15.4.2018 46.3 24.4 11.4 14.8 6.2 7.5 <0.01 0.34 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 114.6 53.4 168.0 266

20/21.04.2018 46.4 24.5 11.5 15.0 7 7.9 <0.01 0.38 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 118.0 54.2 172.2 253

21/22.04.2018 46.5 24.6 11.6 15.1 7.1 7.8 <0.01 0.36 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 117.2 56.1 173.3 261

Min 44.1 22.3 9.3 10.8 3.5 6.5 <0.01 0.12 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 108 49.5 159.6 239

Max 46.5 24.6 11.6 15.1 7.1 8.6 <0.01 0.67 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 122 75.4 192.3 295

Avg 45.3 23.5 10.5 12.9 4.9 7.7 <0.01 0.54 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 115.4 57.7 173.2 267.0

98th percentile 46.5 24.6 11.6 15.1 7.1 8.6

<0.01 0.63 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 121.1 73.2 190.9 295.0


Annexures

184

ANNEXURE III: HSE

Environmental Clearances

HSE Policy: Exploration and production of hydrocarbon involves risk and close

interaction with surrounding environment. To safeguard the working and

surrounding environment, ONGC has adopted a well-defined HSE policy focusing

on Occupational Health, Safe Operation and control of pollution.

Statutory Compliance: In carrying out its operations and safety requirements,

ONGC abides by laws pertaining to oil and gas exploration and production in

India, particularly the Directorate General of Mines Safety (DGMS) and Oil

Industry Safety Directorate (OISD). All statutory consents are obtained under

section 21 of Air Act, under section 25 of Water Act and Authorization under Rule

3(C) & 5(5) of the Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules for

meeting operational requirements. All the stipulations are monitored and timely

reported to the respective regulatory agencies.

ISO certified: All the installations of ONGC have an integrated

management System based on requirements of ISO 9001,

OHSAS 18001 and ISO 14001 and certified by third party. The

integrated management system is in place since 2004. All

operating facilities were certified to ISO 9001 since 2004-05.

Today 412 nos. working units of have third party certified

integrated QHSE Management System.

Corporate Environment Policy: The environment

management system of ONGC is top driven, effective and

vibrant. Top management commitment for prevention of

pollution and protection of environment is evident in the exclusive Corporate Environment Policy statement stating

the commitment.

Renewable energy: ONGC’s holistic focus on sustainable growth ensures its thrust on pursuing renewable sources

of energy, decreasing our internal carbon footprint and exploring unconventional hydrocarbons. We are setting up a

102 MW Wind Farm in Rajasthan, in addition to a 51 MW Unit already working successfully in Buhl, Gujarat. The

planned investment is about INR 8 billion and the plant is likely to be commissioned by 2014-15.

Energy conservation: ONGC has well defined energy policy which focuses on various aspects of energy

conservation. The introduction of environment friendly and energy efficient technologies led to an estimated savings

of INR 409.23 Crores during 2011-12.

Green Building: ONGC acknowledges that buildings have major

environmental impact over their entire life cycle. Hence, ONGC

has taken up concept of constructing green building, the essence

of which would be to address all these issues in an integrated and

scientific manner with due compliance to the guidelines of GRIHA

(Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment). As part of its

commitment to sustainable development, ONGC has taken up

development of Green Buildings at Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata &

Dehradun. These buildings are expected to save 50 to 60%

energy, save water by about 30%, harvest 100% rainwater and

http://www.ongcindia.com/wps/wcm/connect/ongcindia/home/initiatives/hse/environmental_clearance


Annexures

185

discharge zero sewage and as compared to baseline buildings.

Biodiversity Conservation: Apart from complying with the

environmental legal requirements, ONGC, as a responsible

corporate citizen has taken many initiatives to conserve nature

and minimize impact of our operations. Various initiatives taken

by ONGC in operational and outside operational areas are:

Mangrove Plantation: ONGC has undertaken massive mangrove plantation drive in operational areas. In the Phase

1 of the project, 12 lakh saplings and about 5 lakh seeds and propugules were planted in the erosion-prone area

along the coast of the Dhadar river at Ankleshwar. Following the success of the Phase 1 of 'Mangrove Restoration

and Conservation Education Project' at Ankleshwar, ONGC has gone for the continuation of the mangrove plantation

at Ankleshwar and Hazira.

Ringal Plantation: We are working on a long-term project to plant Ringal

Bamboo in the fragile Upper Himalayan Region which is also focus area

outlined in National Action Plan for Climate Change by Prime Minister.

This project extends over a period of 5 years and covers an area of 730

hectares.

Project Eastern Swamp Deer: ONGC is also working for protection of eco-system

of the North-Eastern region of the country, particularly the state of Assam. The

region of Kaziranga in upper Assam is home to the famed one horned Rhinoceros

and the Eastern Swamp Deer. It is also home to only surviving pool of Eastern

Swamp Deer found in the Kaziranga National Park.

Bioremediation: Accidental oil spillages and the tank bottom sludge generated

during the routine operations do pose threat to the environment. ONGC hence

decided to look for environmental friendly options for the disposal and treatment.

ONGC explored the biotechnological option i.e. bioremediation wherein the

indigenous microorganisms are isolated, enriched and harnessed on mass scale

for application in the field. ONGC collaborated with The Energy and Resources

Institute (TERI, India) for supplying necessary technology and resources for

carrying out the project on bioremediation.


Annexures

186

Safety

Risk assessment and control

The ONGC has developed SMS based on OHSAS 18001 which is third party certified. All hazards are identified

and associated risks are evaluated, quantified and brought to acceptable level through relevant work procedure &

management plans. Emergency preparedness is part of the system.

ONGC follows five basic steps to manage its operational risk.

1. Identify Hazard

2. Assess Risk

3. Decide Control Measures

4. Implement Control Measures

5. Monitors and Review

Institute of Engineering & Ocean Technology (IEOT) is the nodal

agency for HAZOP & QRA studies in close association with

Institute of Petroleum Safety Health and Environmental

Management (IPSHEM), Institute of Oil and Gas Production

Technology (IOGPT) and Institute of Drilling Technology (IDT)

Efforts taken to build and maintain safety & health culture at workplace

To imbibe HSE culture among ONGC employees various programme were undertaken across the organization.

Safety awareness campaign is organized every year on the occasion of National Safety Day on 4th March. An

online quiz at all work centres of ONGC was launched for employees by CMD and winners receive recognition

certificate by CMD, ONGC for motivating them.

Apart from local safety awareness campaign, a complete organization level safety awareness campaigns are

launched every year with specific themes. The details of some them are provided as below:

Humsafe Campaign: In the year 2012, “Humsafe” campaign is

launched. It is a campaign which will spur everyone to think

safety and act safely for himself and his team. ONGCians

Promise of Humsafe: “To establish a Sustainable, Safe and

World-Class working environment in ONGC, I promise to be safe

myself & will leave no stone unturned for the safety of my team

and colleagues”.

Contractor Safety Workshop: To improve upon the safety

culture among contract workers, a series of workshops with

participation by senior management of both ONGC as well as

contractors was arranged during the period FY 2010-11 under the campaign "Safe Together – Tomorrow” and

“Effective supervision is the Key."

Workshop on Occupational Health and Industrial Hygiene: To promote 'Health is Wealth', a one-day workshop

on 'Occupational Health and Industry Hygiene' was inaugurated on 23 December 2011 by Mr. A K Hazarika, former

Director (Onshore) at New Delhi. Mr. Hazarika expressed that monitoring the health level of ONGC workforce was

of paramount importance. Dr. Meena Shah of Medico Media, Ahmedabad, defined health as a dynamic integration

of body, mind and spirit.

Emergency Response: The Oil and Gas Exploration & Production Activities are dangerous. Although built-in

safety systems at the design stages greatly reduce the risk-fallout probabilities, we still are prepared adequately to


Annexures

187

plan for mitigating the consequences of such disasters by mobilizing internal and external resources. Site specific

emergency response plan (ERP) for individual installation and Disaster Management Plan (DMP) at asset level is

an integral part of emergency response. Offsite DMP plan at district level have also been made and approved by

competent authorities. Corporate DMP is activated when the decision of top management are required with the

involvement of and Govt. of India.

Dedicated Crisis Management team

Blowout Control and all other related jobs of Drilling, Workover and Production of various Assets & Basins are

handled by 4 Regional Crisis Management Teams namely RCMT-Rajahmundry, Baroda, Sivasagar, Mumbai. All

these 4 Teams will be headed by respective Head-RCMTs under the functional guidance of Head-CMT-Operations.

Apart from the Mitigation of Blowouts, these teams are involved in Kick Circulation, Equipment Audit, Critical Well

Reviews, Crew Trainings and Preparation of Contingency plans & SOPs etc. as part of preventive measures. The

Team and Infrastructure at Mumbai, caters to the need of Mumbai Offshore.

Oil Spill Management:

ONGC has tier-1 capability of combating oil spills of up to 700

tons. Necessary booms, skimmers and chemicals are

available for the purpose. For Tier-II, ONGC has inked MoU

with MPT, JNPT & other oil companies for the implementation

of the National Oil Spill Disaster Contingency Plan (NOS-

DCP) in coordination with Indian Coast Guard. For combating

oil spills of higher magnitude (Tier-III), membership of

international response agency Oil Spill Response Limited

(OSRL), U.K has been taken by ONGC.


Annexures

188


Annexures

189

190

ANNEXURE IV: TOR

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENTenvironmentclearance.nic.in/.../EIA/01102018MHVW38DTEIAReportB… ·...

Documents

Transcript of ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENTenvironmentclearance.nic.in/.../EIA/01102018MHVW38DTEIAReportB… ·...